The URL can be used to link to this page

CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION - 07-0044-PR I','" l' .~ . ;~ I;: c lfJ:,i.!- ilil);,i'I' I~ ~ I~l ' I: II i. ,~ I~ i~"'I:" iIi; '~ ~j ~ I~,~ .' IJ II j~~!: Il~ ' "4; ,II' II il!! , - :~':~ l' If. , !~. i~ &, " :~- II !i~ :!r. ; lr:ti, ( I' I,i>, , I/o' lilli' ~ tl, Ii 1,1'1' I, ( ~ ~il ~ !~ l~~:i< ~11' ,~ l~m:" ~:"fi"';t~' I .~ I~:;';' ) " , l~~, ~; 'f'y,,';! ki "I<'E$,:', r,: lOOS , . ..H ~~I tONTRACT DOCUMENTS fY~1l18Y AND HNICAL SPECIFICATION;liH RWATER BEACH LIBRA"1 & RECREATION CENTER CONOLIDATION ... (07-0044-PR) PREPARED FOR ; Clearwater - o ISSUED FOR BID NOVEMBERl2007 -- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS CLEARWATER BEACH LffiRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION PROJECT NO. 07 - 0044 - PR CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the Municipal Services Bldg., Engineering Office, 2nd Floor, Room 220, 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Monday thru Friday, ON TUESDAY, NOVEMBER, 13, 2007, until no later than close of business three days preceding the bid opening. A charge of $100.00, none of which will be refunded, will be made for each set. The work for which proposals are invited consists of site and interior building demolition, renovation and new construction of a library room, fitness weight room, multi purpose room, storage rooms of all trades, miscellaneous site civil work consists of asphalt and concrete flatwork at the Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center Consolidation, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater, Florida 33767; TOGETHER WITH NECESSARY APPURTENANCES. A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on TUESDAY, NOVENBER 20, 2007 at 10:00 AM. ON SITE at CLEARWATER BEACH RECREATION CENTER IN THE SOCIAL HALL, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, 33767. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Architect will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasin2 Mana2er, at the Purchasin2 Office, located at the Municipal Services Bld2.. 100 So. Mvrtle Ave.. 3Td Floor. Clearwater. Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on FRIDAY, DECEMBER, 7,2007, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for CLEARWATER BEACH LffiRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION PROJECT NO. 07 - 0044 - PRo A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available only to City pre-qualified contractors in the construction category of COMMERCIAL BUILDING with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $350.000.00 . Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project, as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be interested as a possible subcontractor, supplier, etc., may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and pay items worksheet. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 I-Master Ad for Contract Documents.doc Page I of I Revised: 10/09/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: S E CTI 0 N II ......"" .................. ........." .... ..." ..... ...... ..."""".. ........ .... ................. ..." ........................ .......... i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS.......................................................................... 1 2 Q U ALIFI CATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE .................................1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME ... ......... ..." ..." ..... .... .................................. ............ .......... ..... .......... ...... 3 7 LI Q UIDA TED D AMA GES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 S UBCO NTRA eTO RS ....."" .... .......""" ... .... ... .... ..... ........ ........... ........" ..... ... ........ ............ ...... 3 10 BID/PR 0 POSAL FORM .... .............. .......... .... .... ...... ........ ....... .... ...... ........ ..... ........... ...... 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .....................................................................................................5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER.............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PR OTES T ... ..... ............ .................. .......... ................... ...... .......... ...... ......................... 7 20 TREN CD SAFETY A CT ................................................................................................. 8 SectionIl Instruction to Bidders Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available for the sum stated in the Advertisement for Bid from the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents reproduction costs and is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; ( c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical SectionII Instruction to Bidders Revised: 5/11/2005 Section II - Instructions to Bidders data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. SectionlI Instruction to Bidders 2 Revised: 51I 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Commission, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed SectionIl Instruction to Bidders 3 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section II - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract. Agreement to the City Commission, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid documents. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the SectionII Instruction to Bidders 4 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modifY the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modifY any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROY AL TV FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SectionIl Instruction to Bidders 5 Revised: 5/1 I/2005 Section II - Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated atherwise in the Technical Specificatians. 16.2 The Cantractar shall assume all liability far the payment af royalty fees due ta the use af any canstructian lOr aperatian process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated atherwise in the Technical Specificatians. The amaunt af royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Cantractar. 16.3 The Cantractar shall pay all applicable sales, cansumer, use and ather taxes required by law. The Cantractar is respansible far reviewing the pertinent State Statutes invalving the sales tax and sales tax exemptians and camplying with all requirements. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accardance with the requirements afSectian 287.087 Flarida Statutes regarding a Vendar Drug Free W arkp1ace, in the event af identical tie bids, preference shall be given ta bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever twa lOr mare bids which are equal with respect ta price, quality" and service are received by the City far the procurement af cammadities lOr cantractua1 services, a bid received fram a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free warkplace program shall be given preference in the award pracess. Established pracedures fior pracessing tie bids will be fallawed if nane lOr all af the tied bidders have a drug-free warkp1ace pragram. In arder ta have a drug-free warkplace pragram, a cantractar shall supply the City with a certificate cantaining the fallawing six statements and the accampanying certificatian statement: (1) Publish a statement natifying emp1ayees that the unlawful manufacture, distributian, dispensing, passessian, lOr use af a cantrolled substance is prohibited in the warkp1ace and specifying the actiansthat will be taken against emp1ayees far vialatians af such prahibitian. (2) Infarm emplayees as ta the dangers af drug abuse in the warkplace, the business's palicy af maintaining a drug-free warkp1ace, any available drug caunseling, rehabilitatian, and emp1ayee assistance pragrams, and the penalties that may be impased upan emp1ayees far drug abuse via1atians. (3) Give each emplayee engaged in providing the cammadities lOr cantractua1 services that are under bid a capy af the statement specified in subsectian (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsectian (1), natify the emplayees that, as a canditian af warking an the cammadities lOr cantractua1 services that are under bid, the emplayee will abide by the terms af the statement and will natify the emp1ayer af any canvictian af, lOr plea af guilty lOr nala contendere ta, any vialatian af chapter 893, lOr af any cantralled substance law, af the United States, lOr af any state, far a vialatian accurring in the warkplace na later than five (5) days after such canvictian. (5) hnpase a sanctian an, lOr require the satisfactary participatian in a drug abuse assistance lOr rehabilitatian program if such is available in the emplayee's cammunity, by any emp1ayee wha is sa canvicted. (6) Make a gaad faith effart ta cantinue ta maintain a drug-free warkplace thraugh implementatian af this sectian. I certify that this firm daes/daes nat (select anly lOne) fully camp1y with the abave requirements. SectionIllnstruction to Bidders 6 Revised: 5/l1l2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five business days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully SectionII Instruction to Bidders 7 Revised: 5/1112005 Section II - InstlUctions to Bidders coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work days of receipt of the appeal. 19 .3 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. SectionIl InstIUction to Bidders 8 Revised: 5/1l/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: S E CTI ON III...................... .... ~......................... ................. .............. ..... .... .... ............................. ..... i GENERAL CONDITIONS ....... ....... ......... ..... ....... ... ..... ......... ..... ... ......... .............. .......... .... ........ i 1 D EFINITI 0 N S ..................................................... .......................... ...................... ............. 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS.. ......................................................................................... 4 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 4 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS....... ...... .......... ....... ....... ......... ........... ...... ............... ....... ....... 4 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIMEINOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ..... .......... ..... ....... ......... ... ...... ......... ........ ..... ....... ..... .................. ..... .......... 4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE .. ..... ..... ..... ................ ...... ......... ... ........... ... ....... 5 2.4 2.5 3 3.1 3.2 4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 5 INTENT........................................................................................................................... 5 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 6 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFEREN CE POINTS ............. ........................................ .............. ................................. 6 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS......................................................................................... 6 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................ 6 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 7 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS ... ... ......... ... .............. ........ ..... ..... ..... ..... ....... ................ ..... ............ 7 5 BONDS AND INSURAN CE ............................................................................................ 7 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND............................... 7 5.2 INSURANCE................................................................................................................... 8 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ....................................................... 9 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE ........................ 9 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITy................................................ 10 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 10 6 CONTRACTORS RES PONS IBILITIES ....................... ........... ................................... 11 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 11 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................;.......11 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 12 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 12 6.5 USE OF PREMISES.......... ........ ....... ...... .... ............... ... .... ...... ........ ...... .... ......... ...... ...... 13 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ...................................14 6. 7 LAWS AND REGULA TIONS...................................................................................... 14 6.8 PERMITS .......... ....... ..... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ..... ........ .... ..... ..... ......... ..... ........ ..... ..... ..... ..... 14 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 15 6.10 EMERGENCIES.. ... .......... ......... ........... ............. ..... ............. ....... .... ...... ..... ..... .... .... ....... 15 6.11 DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................. 16 SectionIIl General Conditions Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES .................................................................... 16 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS.... ............... ........................ .............. .......... .......... ....... ..... 17 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ............... .......................................... ....................................... 19 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:........ ............. ........ ...... ......... .... ..... ..... ......... .......... ....... ....... ........ 20 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE........................... 21 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 21 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION....... ................. ...... ........ .... ............................ ........... ......... .......... 21 7 OTHER WORK ............................................................... ......... ....................... ............... 22 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................22 7 .2 COORDINATION ............................. .............. ...... ........................ ................. ........... .... 23 8 OWNERS RES PONS IBILITY ...... ......... ... ................................... ........................ ......... 23 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 23 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................... 23 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS........................................................ 24 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................24 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 24 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES... ............... ...... ........... ............. .......... ........ ............. ......... 24 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................... 25 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK.......................................................................................... 25 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE...................................................................26 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE.................................................................... 26 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 27 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 27 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 28 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK......... ......................... ........................... .................................. 28 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 28 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK.... ..... ...... ........... ......... ................... ...... ......... .......... ........ 29 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK ........................................................................ 29 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 30 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 30 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 30 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK....................................................... 30 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 31 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 31 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ...............................................................32 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 32 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 33 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION..................... ............ ........ ............... .................... ..... .................. 33 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 33 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPT ANCE................................................................... 34 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 34 SectionIIl General Conditions 11 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 35 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK...................................................................... 35 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ......................................................................................35 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 36 16 D IS PUTE RESOLUTION...... ..... .................... ....................... ................ ........................ 36 17 MISCELLANEOUS ..... ......................... ................................. ....... .......... ....................... 37 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS................................................................. 37 17.2 GIVING NOTICE...................... ......... ...... ............ ...... ...... ........ ..... ............ ............ ........ 37 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM.... .................. ..... .......... .............. ............ ....... ....... ....... .......... ....... 37 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED..................................... 37 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 37 17 .6 RENEWAL OPTION ........ ......... ............. ..... ...... ................... .......... ....... ....... ..... ........... 37 SectionIIl General Conditions iii Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the' opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agreement The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory revie~ of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Florida. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution ofthe Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. SectionIIl General Conditions Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. Day A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer or his duly appointed representative. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseemg. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Section III General Conditions 2 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Notice to Proceed A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida Person A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part ofthe Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. SectionIIl General Conditions 3 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor four copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date which the Contact Time commences to run. SectionIIl General Conditions 4 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer may schedule a conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be SectionIIl General Conditions 5 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4 AVAilABiliTY OF lANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the SectionIlI General Conditions 6 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on SectionIIl General Conditions 7 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to the Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in, accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) City of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until [mal payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in SectionIlI General Conditions 8 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE I Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate SectionIIl General Conditions 9 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the Owner. Lon2shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or" entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be "'listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the SectionIIl General Conditions 10 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBiliTIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever Engineer shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of Engineer. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally approved holidays. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to release of final payment or the Engineer may elect to receive a monthly check., from the Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $40.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good SectionIIl General Conditions I] Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section III - General Conditions discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a SectionIIl General Conditions 12 Revised: 5/11/2005 I , I I I I I I I, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not payor employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance ofthe Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction SectionIlI General Conditions 13 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section III - General Conditions equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge.of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. SectionIIl General Conditions 14 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which' shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer SectionIIl General Conditions 15 Revised: 5111/2005 Section III - General Conditions prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, techniqu.e, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or 'Samples shall not relieve Contractor :from responsibility for any variation :from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of SectionIIl General Conditions 16 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the City Inspector for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As- Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the City Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The City's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor/Consultant shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61017-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. Two hard copies of signed and sealed as-builts and an AutoCAD file will be provided for this purpose. Definition: 61017-6.002(8)(a) As-Builts Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the City of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the City will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1 ,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the City with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the SectionIlI General Conditions 17 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, I-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the City the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the City of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61017 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the City to have minimum location points at every change indirection and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. ~~..,,.. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. SectionIlI General Conditions Revised: 5/11/2005 18 I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.11.3 6.11.3.1 6.11.3.1.1 CAD STANDARDS Layer Naming Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part ofthis contract) -line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6. 11.3.1.2 La' er Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRNE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes ... TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOP BERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs SectionllI General Conditions 19 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions WALL walls, except seawall . SHORE . shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property comers, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.50, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELlVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on stable based Mylar or vellum material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1" = 20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format with all project data in Land Development Desktop (LDD) Rl or later, including all associated dependent files. When LDD is not available, upon approval by the City of Clearwater Project Manager, a standard ASCII file can be delivered with all associated drawing and dependent files. The ASCII file shall be a comma or space delimited containing code, point number, northing, easting, elevation and description for each data point. Example below space delimited ASCII file: POINT # 284 EASTING 264286.635 DESC BCV NORTHING 1361003.838 ELEV 25.00 or Comma Delimited ASCII File: 284,361003.838,264286.635,25.00, BCV (PNEZD) An AutoCAD Release 2000 drawing or later drawing file shall be submitted. NOTE: If approved deviation from Clearwater or Pinellas County CAD standards are used the consultant shall include all necessary information to aid in manipulating the drawings including either PCP, CTB file or pen schedule for plotting. The drawing me shall include only authorized fonts, shapes, line types or other attributes contained in the standard AutoDesk, Inc. release. All block references and references contained within the drawing me shall be included. SectionIIl General Conditions Revised: 5/11/2005 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727)562-4762 or email address TomMahony@myClearwater.com 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereofby action ofthe elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmles~ Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or SectionlII General Conditions 21 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's own forces, or let other direct contracts therefore which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work, and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefore if Contractor believes that such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the work with th~irs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if he will so settle. If such other contractor sues. the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such SectionIIl General Conditions 22 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall payor satisfy the judgment and pay all costs incurred by the Owner. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed by others under this Article. Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7 .2 COORDINATION If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBiliTY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during SectionIIl General Conditions 23 Revised: 511 1/2005 Section III - General Conditions . construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time SectionIIl General Conditions 24 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authoritY over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Engineer's Consultants and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work SectionlII General Conditions 25 Revised: 5/1112005 Section II1- General Conditions involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Engineer covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without.change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not SectionIIl General Conditions 26 Revised: 5111/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I; I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the'CbIitract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, the Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. SectionIlI General Conditions 27 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid ifnot submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SectionIlI General Conditions Revised: 5/11/2005 28 I I I I I I I I .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price.s SectionIlI General Conditions 29 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk ofloss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance SectionIlI General Conditions 30 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work completed to date will be.held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the Contractor to produce for the Owner, within fifteen days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. SectionIIl General Conditions 31 Revised: 5/1112005 Section III - General Conditions 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear ofliens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to the Owner. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because: (i) claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, SectionlII General Conditions Revised: 5/1112005 32 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as may be required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (1) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, SectionIII General Conditions 33 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section III - General Conditions services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with. the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Engineer. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. SectionlII General Conditions 34 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and dam~ges incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. - SectionIIl General Conditions 35 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section III - General Conditions Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within sixty days after it is submitted or Owner fails for sixty days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven day's written notice to Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions ofthe article for Decisions on Disputes, Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. SectionIIl General Conditions 36 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer subject to the approval of the Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute oflimitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through Public Works Administration may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the City and the ContractorN endor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the City, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by Public Works Administration. SectionlII General Conditions 37 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: S E CTI ON IV iloilo... iloilo..................... iloilo........................... ................ iloilo......................... iloilo.... .......... .............. i TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .... ..... .... ..... ...... ...... .... ..... ................ .......... ........... .... ........ ... .... i 1 seo PE OF WORK......................... .... ...... .............................. ........... ............. .................. 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ..................................................................................4 2 LIN"E, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS................................................................ 6 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 6 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY .................................6 3 D EFIN"ITI ON OF TERMS ....................................... ...... .................................................. 6 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 7 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK.......................................................... 7 6 C ON eRE TE iloilo............................................ iloilo........................... iloilo............... ...................... .... 8 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 9 7.1 EXCAVATION ................................................................................................................ 9 7.2 FORMS ...... ..... ........... ........ .......... ....... ......... ........ ................ .... ....... ................ ....... ......... 9 8 REINFO R CEMENT.............................. ...................... ..................................................... 9 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 9 9 0 BS TR U CTI 0 NS ............................................................................................................. 9 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... 10 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................ 10 12 DEW A TERIN G .. ............................... ............................................................................ ...11 13 SANITARY MANHOLES ............... ................................................................................11 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE ....... ........... ...... ............ ........................ ..... ........ ................ ........ .... ......11 -~~' -,., . 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .. ..... ..... ........ ..:.......:.... ...... .......... ..... .... .............. ........... ......... ......... .... 12 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 12 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 13 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 13 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS ........................ .... ...... ........ ...... ..... ..... ...... ..... ................ ......... 13 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 13 14 BACKFILL.................................................. ......................... ................................ ........... 13 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. ....................................................................................... 14 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAIN"AGE S TR U CTURES................................................................................................................ 14 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Revised: 5/1 I/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ., ................ ...... ..... ........... ..... ........ ........ ............... .......... ........... 14 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 14 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT............... ............. ............ .............. ........... ..................... 14 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................. ................. ..... ....... .......... ......................... ........... ..... 14 18 UND ERD RAINS .................................... ......................................................................... 14 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT...................................................................................... 15 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..... .......... ............... ............... ................ ........... ............... .......... 15 19 STORM SEWERS ............................ ........... ............... .................................................... 15 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION.................... ....... ..... ........... ................................... ........... 15 19 .2 TESTING .............. .... .................... ............. ................................. ......... ...... ...... ........ ..... 16 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..... ........... ................ .......... ......... ..... ...... .............. ........... .......... 16 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS.............................................................. 16 20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 16 20.1.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE......................................... .............. ................................. 16 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 16 20.2 INSTALLATION. ..... ................ ............ ...... ........... .... ...... ......... .... .......... ........... ........... 17 20.2.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE........................................................................................ 17 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ........... ............................................. ..................................... 17 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 17 20.4 TES TIN G ...................................................................................................................... 1 7 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRA VITY SEWERS.......... ................... ........................................... 17 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS......... ....... ..... .......... .... ........................................... 18 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT . ......... ....... ............. .......... ........................ ............ ..................... 18 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE. ....................................................................................... 18 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ...................... ..... ......................................... ............... .......... 18 21 DRAINAGE ........................... .......................................................................................... 18 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE..........................................................................18 22.1 BASE.......................................................................................................... ......... ......... 18 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 20 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE............................... 20 22.2 SUBGRADE ... ....... ...... ... ...... ..... ....... ... ... ..... ...... ...... .............. ....... ........... ..................... 20 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.......................................................... ...................... 21 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT................. .,.,................ ,..... ,.............................................. ......... 21 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ...................................................................21 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE....... ................. ............... ...... ........... ............ .............. ......... 21 23.1.1 AGGREGATE.... ............... .............. ........... ... ............................... .......................... 21 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS................................................................................. 21 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE.......... ................. .... ........ .......... ...... .... ............. .... ....... ......... 21 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TypES.................................................................... 22 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 22 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ...............-.....................................23 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 23 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons ii Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.6. J CRACKS.................................................................... ............................................ 23 23.6.2 POTHOLES................................. ........................:................................................. 24 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ...... .............. .... ........... ....................... ..................... 24 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS... ................. .............. ......... ....... .......... 24 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 25 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 25 23.11 BASIS OF PAyMENT.......... ...... ........ .................. ............. ................... ........ ............... 26 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 26 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 26 25 .1 IRRIGATION.. .............................................................................................................. 26 25. J. J DESCRIPTION......................... .................. .......................................................... 26 25. J.2 PRODUCTS ....... ....... ........................................... ....... ......................... ... .............. 28 25. J. 3 EXECUTION........................................................................................................ 32 25.2 LANDSCAPE............................................................................................................... 35 25.2. J GENERAL.......... ....... ............................................................................................ 35 25.2.2 PRODUCTS........................... .......................................... ........................... .......... 40 25.2.3 EXECUTION........................................................................................................ 43 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING................................................... 50 26.1 INTENT ........ .................................... .... .... .............. .......... ............. ....... ....... ...... ...... ..... 50 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 50 26.3 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 50 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ...................................................................51 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ........... ................... .................. ....... ....... ......... ....... ......... 51 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION............ .......... ............ ...... .... .............. ............. ...... ............. ... 52 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ...... ....... .............. .............................. ....... ....... .............. 52 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION.. ...... ....... .............. ...... .............. ..................... ........ ......... 52 26.9 PAYMENT ..... ..... ............... ..... ...... .... ....... ...... ..... ...... ... ...... ... ....... ........ .......... ... ............ 52 27 PLANT MIX nRIVEW AYS ........................................................................................... 52 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............ ........ .......... ................ ........... ......... ........... ......... 53 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ....... ...... .................. ....... ........ ............. ...... ............... .......... ....... 53 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 53 29 C ON eRE TE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 53 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ..... ..................... ........... ........... ....... ...... ......................... 53 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT . ........ ...... ..... .............. ......:................... ............. .......... ........ ....... 53 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAyS......................................................... 54 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS.... ............................. ........ ........... ......... ...... .......... ...... ....... 54 30.2 CONCRETE DRNEW A YS ................. ........... .......................... ..................... .............. 54 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.............. ......................... ............ ............ ....................... 54 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ......... .............................. ....... ....... ............. ................... ............ 54 31 SODDING. ...... ... .......................... ........... ......... .......................... ........... ....................... .... 54 32 SEED IN G.................... ............ .......... ... .... ........... .... ... ... ............ ............ ... .......... ... ...... ..... 55 Section IV Techinical Specificaitons iii Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM S TR U CTURES ........... ......... .............................. ............. ..... .... .......... ............ ........... ....... 55 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 55 33.2 PRECAST TYPE ..... ..... ......... ........ .......... ........ ........... .......... ..... ................. ........... ....... 56 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......... ..... ........... ............. ........ .......... ........ ............ ............. ....... 56 34 MATERIAL USED ................... .... ...................................... .................... ... ..................... 56 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ......................................56 36 STREET SIGNS... ................... ............... ... ... ................................................................... 56 37 A UD I ONID EO TAPE OF WORK AREAS ................................................................. 57 37.1 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY 57 37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR........................................................................................................... 57 37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE......................................... 57 37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE........................................................... 57 37.2. 3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ................... ................ ................ .............. 57 37.2.4 EQUIPMENT........ ................................................................................................ 57 37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, A UDIO'............................................................... 57 37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................... .......................................... 57 37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION...................................................................................... 58 37.2.8 LIGHTING.................................... ........................................................................ 58 37.2.9 SPEED OF TRA VEL............................................................................................. 58 37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX............................................................................................ 58 37.2.11 AREA OF CO VERA GE............................................................... .......................... 58 37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES............................................................................. 59 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ...................................................................59 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 59 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 59 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SySTEMS.................................... 59 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES........... ...... ......... ................ .............................. 59 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ... ....... ............................................. ........ ........................ 59 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 60 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 60 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 60 38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 60 38.10 COMPLIANCE..... ..... ....... ...... ..... ........... ............ .................. ............ ............... .............. 60 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING................................................................. 64 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.................... 64 41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES ................................................................ 65 41.1 SCOPE ............ ............................ ........... .......... ...... ..... ........ ........ ...... ......... ....... ............ 65 41.2 MATERIALS......... .................... ............ .......... ............... .... ........ ...... ........ ............ ........ 65 41.2.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 65 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS..................................................................... 65 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ..... ..................................... ... .......... ............ ........ ........................... 67 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons iv Revised: 5/I 112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES............. ..................................... ..... ........................... ............ ........ 67 41.2.5 HYDRANTS...................................................................................................... ..... 67 41.2.6 SER.VICE SADDLES................................................................................. ............ 68 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS.................................................................. 69 41.2.8 BA CKFLO W PREVENTERS ...................................................... .......................... 69 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES........ ..................................................................................... 70 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 70 41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........ ..... ...... ...... ............... ......... ................ ................ ........ ........ ....... 70 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING................. ........................................................ .............. 70 41.3.2 PIPE LAyING....................................................................................................... 70 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS......................................... 72 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ......... ........ ............ ......... ......................... 72 41.4 TESTS..... ..... ..... ................... ..... ....... ........... ....... ....... .... ................. .... ..... ..... ............ ..... 73 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS........... .................... ......................... .................. ............... 73 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST............................................... ................................................. 73 41.5 STERILIZATION. ......... ..... ....... ..... ......... ..... ..... ..... ............ ..... ...... ............................... 73 41.5.1 STERILIZING A GENT.......................................................... ................................ 73 41.5.2 FLUSHING SySTEM............................................................................................ 73 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE .................... ............ .............. ........ ....... ....... ...... 73 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS...................... ........... ............. ........................ ...... 73 41.5.5 BA CTERIAL TESTS.......................................... ...... .................................. ............ 74 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 74 41.6.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 74 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS........................................................... 75 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS..................................... ....................... ....... 75 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS....................................................................................................... ......... 75 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS....................................................... 75 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 76 43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 76 43 .1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ............ .............. .......................... ....... ........... ....... ............. 76 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS........................ ........................................ ......... ...... ..... ......... 76 43.1.2 BASE COURSE.. ........................................................................ ...... .... ........... ...... 76 43.1.3 PRIME COAT ....................................................................................................... 76 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE...... .................................. .................... ................. ............... 76 43.1.5 SURFA CE COURSE.............. ...... ................................................................ ......... 76 43.1.6 COLOR COAT............ ........................................................... ................ ........ ....... 77 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS... .......... ........ ............... ......... ............... ............. ................... 78 43.2.1 GENERAL........................................................................... .................................. 78 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION.................................................... ................ ............. ........... 79 43.2.3 SLOPE............................................................................................... .............. ...... 79 43.2.4 BASE CONSTR UCTION...... .............................................................. .................. 80 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING....................................................................................... 80 43.2.6 SURFA CE COURSE ............ ............ .............................. ....................................... 80 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER ......................................... ............ .............................................. 80 43.2.8 FENCING....................................................................................................... ...... 81 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS.................................................................................................... 81 Section IV Techinical Specificaitons v Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT.......................................... ...................... .................. ........ 81 43.2.11 SHADE STR UCTURE.... ............... ...... ............................. ....................... .............. 83 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE {Potable).................................................................................. 83 43.2.13 CONCRETE ........... ........ ................................................. ...................................... 83 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING................................................. 83 43.2.15 WATER COOLER................................. ........................... .... ........... ....................... 84 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................. 84 43.2.17 WARRANTY......................... ............................................. ......... ................ ............ 84 44 W.ORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .........................................................................85 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 85 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 85 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY.............. ............................................ ............................... 85 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES.. ..... ......................... .... ...... ......... ........ ............ 86 44.3.1 ALL ROAD WAyS............................. ................................. ................ ..................... 86 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERiALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS................. 86 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERiALS, MINOR ARTERiALS ......................................................... 86 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERiALS......................................................... .................................... 86 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN................................... 87 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 87 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 87 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR......;..,.; 87 45 CURED- IN- PLACE PIPE LININ G .............................................................................. 88 45.1 INTENT ....... ....... .... ........ ...... .... ... .... ....... ...... ...... ...... .... .... ...... ........... ........ ............. ...... 88 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 88 45.3 MATERIALS...... .............. ........ ............ ................ ..... .............. .................. ....... ............ 88 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 88 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION. .......... ................ .......... ......... ................ ............ ............. 89 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ....... .......... .......... ...... .......... ......... .............. ................... ........ 89 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ......... .......... ..... ....................... ......... ..................... ........ 89 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION....... ...................... ........ ............ ....... ..... ..... ............... ...... 89 45.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................... 90 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING..................................... 90 46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 90 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS............ ............................................................................... 90 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................... ................ 90 46.1.3 SAMPLES.... ...:....................................................................................... ............... 90 46.1.4 REJECTION................................................................ ............. ............................. 91 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS. ... ..... ...... ........... ...... ... ..................... ....... ......... .... ...... ................... 91 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ..... ................. ..................... ............. ....... ..... ............. 91 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE.............................. ................... .......................................... 91 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMA GED SECTIONS...... ................................................ .............. 91 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING............. .................................. ...................................................... 91 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE............................................................................. 91 46.4 SLIP LINING PROCEDURE........ ............. .......... .......... ............. ..... .......... ........... ........ 91 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS................................. ..................... 91 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION..................................... ...................................... 92 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons VI Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .......................................................... 92 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER................ ............. ................................. ........... ....... 92 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ......................................................................93 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED................................................ 93 46.4.7 BA CKFILLING .............................................................................. ........ ......... ...... 93 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR............................................... ............................. ............ ............. 93 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS..................................................................... .............. 93 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE...................... 93 47.1 SCOPE .... .... ..... ........ ...... ...... ........... ............. ......... ........... ...... ......... ............ ............ ...... 93 47.2 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 94 47.3 PIPE .. ...... .......... ..... ...... ... ...... ..... ......... ..... ..... ..... ............... ..... .... ...... ......... ...... ...... ........ 94 47.4 JOINING SySTEM.................... .................. .................... ..... .......... ..................... ........ 94 47.5 FITTINGS.. .......... ........ .... ...... ...... .......... ....... ....................... .... ............ ..... ...... ...... ........ 94 48 GUNITE S PECIFI CATIONS ........................................................................................ 94 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 94 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE................. 94 48.3 COMPOSITION ...... ..... ..... ... ..... ......... ...... .... ..... ........ ...... ...... ......... ...... ... ...... ........... .... 95 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS...... ........... ....... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........... ............ .... 95 48.5 MATERIALS ........... ..... ............................... ........... ..... ............... ............... ................... 95 48.6 WATER ....... ..... ......... ............ .... ..... ......... ..... ..... ....... ........ ..... ..... ....... ....... ...... ......... ...... 95 48.7 REINFORCEMENT ........ .... ............. .............. ......... ............. ............ .............. ........ ...... 95 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ...... ........... .... .... .............. .... ... ........... .......... ........... ... ...... 96 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION........ ..... ............. ....... ............. ..... ....... ........ ....... ................ 96 48.1 0 PROPORTIONING... ........ ..... .......... ........ ..... ............... ........... ....... ........ ....... .... ...... ...... 96 48.11 MIXING......................... ............. ......... ........... ..... ........... ............... ............... ................ 96 48.12 APPLICATION.... ..... .......... .......... ................ .......... ....... ................ ........ ........ ..... .......... 97 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS.. ..... .................... ........ ....... ................ ................ ............... 97 48.14 SURFACE FINISH.. ......... ..... ..... ............. ............. ....... ...... ......... ....... ........ ...... ............. 97 48 .15 CURING............................................. .......................................................................... 98 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ..................................................................... 98 48.1 7 INSPECTION......... ....................................................................... ............................... 98 48.18 EQUIPMENT........ ....................................................................................................... 98 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ........................... 99 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ......... ......... ........ ....... .......... ...... .... .......... ..... ................. ............ 99 49 .2 PAyMENT..................".................................................................................................. 99 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ............. ....... ............................... .................... ..... 99 49.3.1 MATERiALS.......................................................... ................. .......-... .................... 99 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION......................... ........... ......... ....... ......... ..... 100 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 100 49.4.1 MATERIALS............................................................................................... ......... 101 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL................................ ............ ..... ....... ...... ............ ............ 101 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 101 49.7 LINER MIX ....... ....... ... ..... ...... ..... ..... ...... ... ... ......... ....... ..... ........ ..... .... ........ ... ............. 101 49 .8 WATER................... ........................ ............ ............ ........................ ..... .......... ............. 102 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS........ .......................... .......... ................ ........ ....... .......... ...... ..... 102 49.10 EQUIPMENT................................................ ...... ............. ............. ............... ..... ......... 102 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons VII Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 103 49.11.1 PREPARATION....................................................................................... ...... ...... 103 49.11.2 MIXING.............................................. ........ ............................................. ............ 103 49.11.3 SPRAyING........................... ........................................................................ ....... 103 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING...................................................... ..... .............................. 104 49.11.5 CURING. .............................. .......... ....................... .............................................. 104 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 104 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 104 49.12.1 SCOPE...... ....................... .............. .................... .................................... ............. 104 49.12.2 MATERIALS........................................................... ........ ........ ............................. 104 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. 107 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ..........................................................................109 50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................................ 109 50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE............................................... 109 50.3 FIXED SIGN ........................................................................... ......................... .......... 109 50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ....... ......... ........................... ...... ..... ...... .................. ............ ..... ..... 109 50.5 SIGN COLORING............ ...... ........ ........ ......... ........ ...... ............ ................... .............. 109 50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT. ....... ....... ............ ......... .................. ......... .............. ............ ........ ..11 0 50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................................11 0 50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN.............. ........................ ......................... .................. ........11 0 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM .............................................................110 51.1 SCOPE........................................................................................................................ .11 0 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS......... ............. ............ ............... .......... .............. ..... ........111 51.2.1 ASPHALT........................................................................................ ..................... 111 51.2.2 CONCRETE......................................................................................................... 111 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX............................................................................ 111 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT.......................................................... 111 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE...........................................................l11 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION ........ .............. ..... ........... ................ ................ ...............112 51.6 PLAYING LINES............ ............... .... ..... ..................... ........... ......... ............... ...... ......112 51.7 GENERAL.................................................................................................................. .112 51. 8 LIMITATIONS........................................................................................................... ..112 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................113 52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY ............................................113 52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR ..........................113 53 GAB I 0 NS AND MATTRESSES .................... ............... ...............................................114 53.1 MATERIAL ... .......... ........ ...... ........... ....... ..... ..... ........... ..... .............. ......... ............. ......114 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL..................... ..... ...... ..... ............ ..114 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: ...............................................117 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE...... ................................................ .............. .................. ......... .117 53.1.4 GEOTEXT'ILE FABRIC... ................ ..... ............................................. ........ ...........117 53.2 PERFORMANCE ........ ...... ...... ......... ................ ......... ......... ................. .... ..... ............. ..117 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................118 54.1 SCOPE.. .... ...................... ...... ...... ............................. ........... ............... .................... ......118 SectionlV Techinical Specificaitons viii Revised: 5/I 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK. .... ....... ............ ...... ...... .................. ......... ............. ........ .....119 54.3 WORK METHODS...... ........ ..... .... ........ .......... ........ ......................... ............ .......... .....119 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING............... ............................................. ........ ....119 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SER VICE VISIT ................. ....... ............... ............ .............. ....... ....119 54.4 LITTER........ .............. ................ ...... ........... ........ .......... .................. ....... ............ .... ... ...119 54.5 VISUAL CHECK. ..................... ...... ........................ ................ ..... .......... .....................119 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ...........................................................119 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 120 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL................. ....................... ............ .......... ........ ............................ 120 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ............... ........................ ....... ............... ..... ................ .............. 120 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETy.... ........ ........... ...... ...... ...... ...... ......... ............. .......... ............. 120 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION .......... ....... ...... ..... ...... ....... ................ ..................... ............ 120 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA......................................................... 120 54.13 MULCH CONDITION..... ......... ................. ........ .......... ....................... ........... ............ 120 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 121 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL..................................................... 121 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION....... .................. .......... ....................... ...... ......... ........ ........... 121 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION...... ............. ........... ...... ........ ... ............ ................. ..... ........... 121 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE.. ........... ........... .... ........ ..... .................... ..... ................. .............. 121 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 121 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL ................................ ...... ...... .......................... ........ 122 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS........... ....... ...... ........................ ........ ................... ........ ........ 122 55 MILLIN G 0 PERATI 0 NS .. ......................................................................................... 122 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE...................................... 122 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 122 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS........ ............ .............. ............ ................................... 123 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ... ................ ....... ............... ......... ......... ............ .............. 123 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ..................123 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 124 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING......... .................... ........... ........ .............. ...... .............. .............. 124 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS........... .......................................... ......................... 124 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.. .......... ..... ....................... ...... ............. ........ ............ ..... 124 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ......... ..... ....... .......... ............................. ...... ............... .............. 124 56 CLEARIN G AND GR UBBIN G ................................................................................... 124 M56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.... ...... ............. ........ ...... ............ ................ ............ ....... 125 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .. ........ .."......... .......... ........ ..... ..................... ......... ..................... 125 57 RIPRAP ....... .... .............................. ..................................... ..................... ...................... 125 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 125 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......................... ............. ....... ............ ..... ...... .............. ............ 125 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 125 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ........... ........... ........ .... ............ ................ ............. ........... ....... 125 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 126 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS........................................... 126 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 126 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons ix Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 60 60.1 61 61.1 62 62.1 62.2 62.3 63 63.1 63.2 63.3 63.4 63.5 63.6 63.7 Section IV - Technical Specifications SI GNIN G AND MARKING..... ........ .... ........................................................................ 126 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................................... 127 ROADWAY LI GHTIN G .............................................................................................. 127 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................................... 127 TREE PR OTE CTI ON................................................................................ ..... ............. 127 TREE BARRICADES ....... ... ...... ... ..... .... ......... ........ ......... ............ ..... .............. ... ........ 127 ROOT PRUNING... .... ..... ......... ..... .... ..... .... ............. ............ ........ ...... ........ ................. 128 PROPER TREE PRUNING. ......... .......... ... .............. ........... ..... .................. ........ ......... 129 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................. ................................................................ 129 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................. ........... .............. .................. .......... ............. 129 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES. ...... ........................ ............. ........ ................. 130 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 130 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ......... ............. .............. ................. ........... ........................... 130 INTERACTIVE FORMS............ .......... .......... ....... ............ .................... ....... ...... ....... 130 POSTING.................................................................................................................... 130 WEB PAGES UPDATES.................. .............. ......... ..... ..... ............... .................. ........ 130 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons x Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR Scope of Work: 1. The work consists of site and interior building demolition, renovation and new construction of a library room, fitness weight room, multi purpose room, storage rooms of all trades, miscellaneous site civil work consists of asphalt and concrete flatwork, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Drawings have been submitted to City of Clearwater - Planning & Development Services Department for Building Permit, successful bidder will be required to provide the following information for the building permit. a. State Contractor's License b. Name holder of the License c. Occupation License d. Pinellas County Licensing Board Number e. There is no fee for Building Permit but will be required to collect the building permit from Planning & Development Services Department. 3. Application has been submitted to Southwest Florida Water Management District (SWFWMD) Permit and there will be no fee for this permit. 4. The owner will install the Fire hydrant shown on the drawings. 5. Owner will provide vertical benchmark on site for contractor's use. 6. The Owner's surveyor will provide layout of building comers and provide tie in survey and gather as built information for as built drawings. 7. Clearing & Grubbing Permit as well as the Tree Removal Permit has been submitted to Land Resources in the Planning & Development Services Department and no fee for these permits. Contractor will be required to collect this permits. 8. Bidders shall note AudioNideo Tape Of Work Areas - by Contractor has been checked off as part of the specification requirement of this project. The taping will require the contractor and the owner to be present during the videotaping and be use to determine any discrepancies of existing condition should the need arise during the construction period a copy shall be provided to the owner. 9. Bidders shall note specifications have been provided by the City of Clearwater and the Architect conflict between plans and specifications contractor shall inform in writing during the bidding process to resolve these issues. Should conflict arise after contract has been awarded the City of Clearwater article 35 shall govern. Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page I Revised: 5/1 \12005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 10. Contractor shall secure his construction area at all times. During the renovation and construction of the new facilities the recreation center will continue operation of the social hall during the construction of this project. 11. The owner is request during the period between January 21, 2008 to February 27, 2008 the first order of construction items listed below must be completed within the allotted time: . Demolition & completion of Women's Restroom . Demolition & Completion of Companion Restroom & Vending area. . Demolition & completion of Storage/Kitchen Area (note Storage No. 3 does not need to be completed in this time period). . Demolition of wall and completion of storage door in Social Hall including 4 plex electrical outlets in each of the comers see drawing E-1.3 Power Plan and Notes. . Demolition of Storage Room into Hallway No.2 . Demolition of Game Room and Art & Craft Rooms & installation of temporary wall between Lobby Area and Proposed Library storefront and Hallway No.1. 12. The remainder of the base bid items to be completed within the remainder of the 120 calendar days ofthe contract and this will be considered Phase I of the contract. 13. All alternate items should the owner elect to include in this contact will be considered as Phase II of the contract. Work of Phase II the contractor shall not begin any of this work until Phase I work has been completed and handed over to the owner for occupation and operation of this portion of the facility. All retainage from Phase I will be paid upon acceptance of completion and handover to the owner of Phase I of the project. The owner will provide notice to proceed with Phase II. The contract shall be extended an additional 60 calendar days to complete the work of Phase II. Because of weekend rentals of the social hall it is anticipated Phase II Add Alternates must be completed between December 8,2008 and February 15, 2008. 14. Contractor will be required to provide sanitation facilities for his staff during the duration of this project. Utilization of City of Clearwater restroom within the facility will not be available during the construction of this project. 15. Electrical and water will be provided during the construction of this project. If electrical and water point of connection are not adequate during the construction of this project the contractor shall make his own arrangements. 16. Locking hardware to Best Locking System with City of Clearwater master keying system. Crash bars are to be Von Dupen and all exterior doors to have battery operated alarm system with keying to activate and deactivate alarm system. Von Dupen crash bars are to be hurricane rated with door and contractor to insure rating is provided from door and hardware manufacture during the biding process. Von Dupen crash bars are also to be provided for doors of the interior doors of the multipurpose room and the fitness weight room, alarms are not required for these doors. 17. Roof gutter system to have antirust leaf guards installed. Gutters and down spouts pre- manufactured and not fabricated on site. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 2 Revised: 5/1\12005 I I I I¶I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 18. The contractor shall remove all existing plans materials as shown on the demolition drawing. 19. Landscaping and irrigation is not part of this contract and will be performed by the Owner. 20. Contractor shall note City of Clearwater - Scope of Work Check List only sections check off will apply to this project even though the entire City of Clearwater Technical Specifications are provided. 21. The contractor shall also review the Architect's Technical Specifications Section 01010 Summary Of The Work for additional scope of work items not incorporated in this section. 22. The general contractor will be required to provide all conduit, raceways and junction boxes for telephone, data and cable television. The owner will provide the conductors and other hardware for the telephone, data and television systems. 23. Electrical duplex junction boxes in the fitness weight room within in the sport surface, these junction boxes shall extend out from the masonry wall and flush with the sport surface. When cover plates are placed on these duplex outlet shall be snug against the sport surface. 24. Marie Company City of Clearwater fire system monitoring company will perform fire alarm system hardware and wiring for the fire alarm system. General Contractor shall be required to install all conduits, raceways and junction boxes as shown on the contract documents and coordinate work with Marie Company. 25. Contractor will be required to provide Flood Proofing of all new construction of doors and windows from finish floor elevation up to 72" from finish floor. Contractor shall review cun-ent flood proofing system within the existing recreation center and provide same like flood proofing as part of the base bid. Contractor shall label with metal tagging system the flood proofing panels and window/door location to assist in identifying locations during installations. Contractor to install flood proofing panels as part of close out of project for owner inspection and removal for storage approval and acceptance of the flood proofing panels. 26. The owner will perform video camera hardware and wire installation. The general contractor shall provide all conduits, raceways and junction boxes at all locations as shown on the contract documents. 27. All bidders must be pre-qualified with the City of Clearwater at the end of the Section IV is the letter of pre-qualification to bid with the City of Clearwater and the application form. The qualification application of prospective bidders must be sent to City of Clearwater Construction Division two (2) weeks prior to the bid date. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 3 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 0' Scope Of Work 2.1 0' Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by Contractor 2.2 D Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by City 3 0' Definition Of Terms 4 D Order And Location Of The Work 5 0' Excavation For Underground Work 6 0' Concrete 7 0' Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 0' Reinforcement 9 0' Obstructions 10 0' Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 D Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 0' Dewatering 13 [ ] Sanitary Manholes 14 0' Backfill 15 D Street Crossings, Etc. 16 D Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 0' Unsuitable Material Removal 18 D Underdrains 19 0' Storm Sewers 20 D Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 0' Drainage 22 0' Roadway Base And Sub grade 23 0' Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 [ ] Adiustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 D General Planting Specifications 26 D Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 [ ] Plant Mix Driveways 28 D Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 0' Concrete Curbs 30 0' Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 D Sodding 32 D Seeding 33 0' Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 0' Material Used 35 0' Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 D Street Signs 37.1 D Audio/Video Tape Of Work Areas - by City 37.2 0' Audio/Video Tape Of Work Areas - by Contractor 38 0' Erosion And Siltation Control SectionlV Techinical Specificaitons Page 4 Revised: 5111/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 39 0 Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 0 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 1 Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 0 Gas System Specifications 43 0 Tennis Courts 44 0 Work Zone Traffic Control 45 0 Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining 46 0 Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 Gunite Specifications 49 0 Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 0 Project Information Signs 51 0 In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52.1 0 Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by City 52.2 0 Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by Contractor 53 0 Gabions and Mattresses 54 0 Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 0 Milling Operations 56 0 Clearing and Grubbing 57 0 Riprap 58 0 Treatment Plant Safety 59 0 Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 0 Signing And Marking 61 1 Roadway Lighting 62 0 Tree Protection 63 1 Project Web Pages BASE BID TIME: 150 DAYS ALTERNATE ITEMS TIME: ...&L DAYS Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 5 Revised: 5/1 112005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2 LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Benchmarks to be used shall be those as shown on the plans. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit cut sheets for all underground work 24 hours in advance of commencement of the work for checking. Checking of cut-sheets does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities for any errors or conflicts whatsoever. Cut sheets shall be submitted in triplicate. The Contractor shall provide three complete sets of Record construction drawings prior to final payment being made. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $1 00.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications the following definition of terms shall apply: City City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, FL. Engineer The City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. Contractor The person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Inspector An authorized representative of the City Engineer of Clearwater, assigned to make official inspections of the material ful11ished and the work performed by the Contractor. FD. O. T. The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as Specifications issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). A.A.S.HT.O American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. A.WS. American Welding Society SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 6 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications A. S. T.M American Society for Testing Materials A.S.A. American Standards Association A.NS.1. American National Standards Institute A. W WA. American Water Works Association o.S.HA. Occupational Safety & Health Administration A. c.I. American Concrete Institute Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions ofthese persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Estimated Quantities The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion ofthe work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 7 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 8 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I' I , I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the sub grade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or spnngmg. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/ A 77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 9 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 10 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page II Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) 1. All grade adjustments of manhole frame and cover assemblies shall be completed utilizing the following: High Density Polyethylene Grade Adjustment Rings - Comply with ASTM Standard D-1248 for recycled plastic. a. Material properties shall be tested and certified for usage by the following ASTM methods: b. Property Test Method Acceptable Value c. Melt Flow Index ASTM D1238 0.3 to 30 g /10 min. d. Density ASTM D792 0.94 to 0.98 g / cm3 e. Tensile Strength ASTM D638 2.00 to 5 x 103 lb / in 2 f. Polyethylene adjusting rings shall not be used when they are exposed to heated hot mix asphalt pavement. g. Tapered configuration: When used in a single configuration tapered adjusting ring thickness will range from 0.5 inch to 3.0 inch. h. Grade adjustment rings are to be installed on clean flat surfaces according to the manufacturer's recommendations with the proper Butyl Rubber sealant/adhesives. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 12 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. The inside diameter of the adjustment ring shall not be less than the inside diameter of the manhole frame. 3. Manholes shall be constructed with at least two adjustment rings. 4. Maximum height of adjustment ring stack: 12 inches max. for new manholes and 16 inches max. on existing manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two coats of bitumastic black solution 300 M as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc. or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of PRO CO EP 214351 Epoxi Mastic as manufactured by Protective Coatings Inc. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 13 Revised: 5/1112005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC. At such crossings,. and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 14 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I ,I I I I I I I I I I I I :1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number oflineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 15 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 12.5 feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 16 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I I I I If I I I I I I I I I I, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. . All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rej ected. 20.2 INSTAllATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (112" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUilT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 17 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe' with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or ex filtration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for one hour, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and sub grade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV; Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and sub grade items. Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 18 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I . . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The sub grade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and sub grade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designe~. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item pr,ice for base. . 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. SectionlV Techinical Specificaitons Page 19 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. . 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to' complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All sub grade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the sub grade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 20 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I, Section IV - Technical Specifications Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or sub grade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized sub grade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S- Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 21 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of ~" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of W' or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Proiect Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S-III FC-3 Type S-III Type S-I Type S-III with FC-3 with FC- 3 Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1~ 1~ SectionIV Techinical Speciticaitons Page 22 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I ,I I I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I I: I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 2 1~ * * 1 1 2Y2 1~ 1~ 1Y2 1 1Y2 1 3 1Y2 1Y2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" ofS-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 23 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each nser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be inclqded in the per ton bid item for asphalt. Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 24 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I , (I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be W' above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 25 Revised: 5/l1/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published montWy by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com.Itis under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The montWy billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 9. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 26 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/1andscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business tel~phone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name( s) and addressees) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the En!:,rineer at the conclusion ofthe project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 27 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl CW6ride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approvaL The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PYC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PYC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PYC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 28 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe- T-Shear Stem 5. Safe- T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, S ylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (OPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemicallUV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 29 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal LD. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (112") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (LD.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length ofthe dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the drip line manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 30 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.4 AIRlVACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through 'or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn, on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 31 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 lATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, ofEFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTAllATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 32 Revised: 5111/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFilLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFilLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" offill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than ~ in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 ofFDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 33 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing oflines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. INSTAllATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure IS on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 34 Revised: 51ll/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. R Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 35 Revised: 5/1112005 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance oflandscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard oflandscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 36 Revised: 5/1 \12005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. CT.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. CW: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR.: Straight trunk. MIN: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, Le., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. o.C: On center, distance between plant centers. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 37 Revised: 5/1 I/200S Section IV - Technical Specifications DIA.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-112 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner s Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 38 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk~ root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 39 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 40 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. 1. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 41 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Install mulch to an even depth of3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than ~ the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - %" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled" and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over I". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 42 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - 'l1 feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 43 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - ~ inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native sub grade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (113), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 44 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTAllATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0- 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 lAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant SIzes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of'the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 45 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each W' (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. E. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 46 Revised: 5/l1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 47 Revised: 5/1112005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 48 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written andlor graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner andlor Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The [mal selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 49 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTAllER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=l13,OOO psi Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 50 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 51 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 26.6 liNER INSTAllATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 lATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 52 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products. In this regard, the City is required to determine the monthly total tonnage of all construction debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration. If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in the original contract proposal. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionIV Techinical Speciticaitons Page 53 Revised: 5/ I 1/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4 '). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 54 Revised: 5/1 112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the EJ?gineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 55 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Whenever a conflict appears between the plans and specifications, the more stringent requirement shall apply. If a conflict is of such a nature as to require a decision, then a written request for clarification must be made prior to starting that phase of construction. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 56 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 37 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS 37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY This project will not require the preparation of an audio/video tape of work areas by the Contractor. 37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR 37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO TAPE Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video tape recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO TAPE The video recordings shall not be made more than 21 days prior to construction in any area. 37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video tape documentation. 37.2.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio videotape coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each tape shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each videotape shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 57 Revised: 5/1112005 Section IV - Technical Specifications information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.2.8 LIGHTING All taping shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed 44 feet per minute. 37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering surveyor coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 58 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at anyone time. 37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 59 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent sub drain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at anyone time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COM PLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance ofa "Stop Work Order". SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 60 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 6 I Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Public Works Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a Planning & Development Services Inspector or a Public Works Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence Warning 2nd occurrence $32 reinspection fee 3rd occurrence $80 reinspection fee 4th occurrence Stop work order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Public Works Administration Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a Public Works inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Public Works Administration with specific questions at 562-4750. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 62 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I --~~------~-~------ Section IV - Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Reinspection Fee $80.00 Reinspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741 & PUBLIC SERVICES/CONSTRUCTION 727 462-6126 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 63 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6" x 3" and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4" X 2" and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed, which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 - General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within PHASE I - 150 & PHASE II - 60 consecutive calendar days. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Assistant Public Services Director, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Three Hundred Twenty Dollars ($320.00) per eight-hour day for each Inspector given such assignment. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 64 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modem design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSIIAWWA CI51/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure (In.) (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance withANSIIAWWA C1511A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSIIAWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest reVISIon. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 65 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4" through 8" shall be in accordance withANSIIAWWA C900 81 or latest revision aild the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length (OD/Thick.) (PSI) (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8" shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4" through 8" when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4" and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with an insulated 12 gauge A.W.G solid strand copper wire wound around the pipe forming one complete spiral per joint of pipe. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by methods approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4" through 16" in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSIIAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSIIAWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSIIAWWA CI04/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSIIAWWA Clll1A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 66 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1\ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated. Valves three inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Smaller than two inch: Gate valves less than two inches in diameter shall be of brass and shall conform to Federal Specification WW V 54, Type 1 or 11 with screwed joints. Valves for interior piping shall be Type 11, wedge disc, rising stem, inside screw type. Valves for buried service shall be Type 1, wedge disc, nonrising stem. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves in conformance with ANSI! A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 80 or latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion resistent coating. Larger than sixteen inch: Gate valves larger than 16" shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc type with 0 ring seals. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. 41.2.5 HYDRANTS Fire hydrants used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system shall be the following hydrants: . Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, . Mueller Centurion Fire Hydrant Catalog Number A 423 SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 67 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications . U.S. Pipe Metropolitan No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval ofthe City of Clearwater. Above fire hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the A WW A Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. Basic design will be the dry barrel type which prevents the operating threads from coming in contact with the service water. It will be of the compression type, opening against the pressure and closing with the pressure. 2. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an "0" ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 3. Hydrant barrel will be of the "Breakable Type" made in two sections with the flange or break feature located approximately 2" above the ground line. 4. Main valve opening ofthe hydrant will be not less than 5 1/4". 5. Hydrant nozzles will consist of two 2 1/2" hose nozzles and one 4 1/2" pump nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 6. The hydrant will be so designed to permit the removal of all working parts from the hydrant up through the barrel without disturbing the earth around the hydrant or disassembling the barrel. 7. Main valve seat will be made of bronze and threaded into a bronze retaining ring. Or it may be threaded into a heavy bronze bushing in the hydrant base. 8. Hydrant will be designed with an anti friction bearing so located that it will reduce the torque required to operate the hydrant. 9. There will be a minimum of two bronze or brass drain outlets. 10. Hydrants shall be painted with one coat of primer and one coat of yellow paint at the factory and one finish coat of yellow paint after installation. All paints shall comply with AWWA Standard C502-85 or its latest revision. 11. The main valve stem will be made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 12. Hydrants shall be left open (counter clockwise) and shall have a National Standard 1112" pentagon operating nut. 13. Hydrant base outlet will be 6" and will be mechanical joint with fittings. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latestAWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4" P.Y.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4" main shall be 1 1/2". Service saddles shall be used on all 2" service SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 68 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I' Section IV - Technical Specifications connections to 6" and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 78 or its latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater, following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of Clearwater Water Distribution system: DOUBLE CHECK VALVE 2" and Smaller Larger than 2" Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40 I 00 Hersev Beeco Model FDC Hersev Beeco No.2 Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007 FEBCO Model 805Y Ames 2000 SS SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 69 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE 2" and Smaller Larger than 2" Ames 5000 SS Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200 Hersey Beeco Model FRP II Hersey Beeco Model 6CM FEBCO Model 825Y Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4" bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs shall be box hydrants having a 2" main valve, closing with the water pressure. These flush mounted hydrants shall have a 2" FIP inlet, with the outlet being a 2 1/2" bronze male nozzle. With all working parts also of bronze, these hydrants will open to the left and have a removable bronze seat, which seals against a seat rubber of no less durometer than 85. All hydrants shall be as manufactured by Kupferle Foundry, St. Louis, Mo., Model #35B or approved equal. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant sterns plumb. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of30" and a maximum of 42" below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line- and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 70 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTAllATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipelaying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at righ,t angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 71 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 72 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of one hour. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron" . 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the closest point available to the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a miniinum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 73 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the Florida State Board of Health prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure final approval of the bacterial samples from the Florida State Board of Health before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL 1. Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. 2. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. 3. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: a) Clearing and grubbing b) Excavation, including necessary pavement removal c) Shoring and/or dewatering d) Structural fill e) Backfill f) Grading g) Tracer wire h) Refill materials i) Joints materials j) Tests and sterilization k) Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 74 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I \1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI! A WW A ell 0/ A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust anchorage, 6 inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 75 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Sub grade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 112" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S- III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of l" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will be approved. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 76 Revised: 9/22/05 , I I I I I I I I I II I I I I I a I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I' I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing. area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 77 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and lor the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors' to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 78 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I .". I I I I I . 'I I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period oftime after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 79 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch ofthe established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (114) to one-half (112) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (118) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 80 Revised: 9/22/05 I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I t I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-112" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-112) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 81 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each comer. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-112" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction " Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) - six-foot length aluminum. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 82 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" - 8'longx 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-Iamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 83 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pole Tl existing 5 fIxture pole, remove one fIxture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fIxture pole, remove six fIxtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fIxture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fIxture pole, remove two fIxtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 84 Revised: 9/22/05 I ,I I I I -, I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I. I I I I, I I I I I I I 'I I 'I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and lor workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: . Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. . Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. . Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. . Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. . Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). . Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. . Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 85 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C- View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 86 Revised: 9/22/05 I :1 I I I :1 I I I I I I I I I I ,I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Office of the Traffic Engineer, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4772, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Office of the Traffic Engineer may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 87 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 88 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 liNER INSTAllATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 lATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system win not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 89 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 90 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) G.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLlPLlNING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: I2-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into IS-inch existing sewer. I6-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into I8-inch existing sewer. I8-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 2I-inch existing sewer. 21 Y2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 91 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2: 1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shalll>,e allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer ,temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 92 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFilLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. " 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 93 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made ofPVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type 1. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 94 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type 1. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve Passing No.4 Sieve Passing No.8 Sieve Passing No. 16 Sieve Passing No. 30 Sieve Passing No. 50 Sieve Passing No. 100 Sieve 100% 95% to 100% 80% to 100% 50% to 85% 25% to 60% 10% to 30% 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 95 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 96 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications . required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Comers shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed comers by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. SectionlV Techinical Specificaitons Page 97 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Compo Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press. ( dm) (In.) (In.) (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 98 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 99 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No.8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. 49.3.2 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 100 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-l 09) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFilTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 101 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 112" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 102 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 103 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLlNE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of /2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 104 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM-C 109 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.17Ibs/gal Tensile Strength 150 psi Elongation 250% Shrinkage Less than 4% Toxicity Non Toxic ASTM D-3574 ASTM D- 412 ASTM D-3574 ASTM D-I042 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 105 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 8.1xlO llem/sec to 7.6xlO cm/sec 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING at 100% RH at 50% RH A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume Color (other colors available on request) Pot Life, hrs Tensile Strength, psi, min Tensile Elongation, % Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 106 1:1 Light Gray 1 2,000 10 -20 5 1,800 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Com Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing! crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 107 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiftbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the tim-e is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 108 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The City desires to inform the general public on the City's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at alllocation( s) of active work. 50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type of signs will be stated in the Scope of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum item will be included in the bid proposal for signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 50.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4' by 8' in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2". Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure treated 4" by 4" below grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24" above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24" by 30" in size and will be attached to a: standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080" or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 50.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 109 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the City's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the City's right-of-way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. 50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN PROJECT NAME A CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT PROJECT FUNDING: CONTRACTOR: CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION: CITY PROJECT MANAGER: PHONE 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System . 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer . 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave . 2 Coats ofPlexiflor . Plexicolor Line Paint SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 110 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page III Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is. factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats ofPlexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Pour hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 500F or more than 1 40oF. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 700P with 60% relative humidity. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 112 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY See below for Resident Notification performed by the Contractor. 52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 y.; by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than 7 days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper 7 day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 113 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / --- PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of 7 days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES 53.1.1.1 Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 114 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four I-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 ~ inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 ~), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger- Tite Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: SectionlV Techinical Specificaitons Page 115 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HCl (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-ll7 b. Period oftest = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM 0-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 116 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than + 18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: . Absorption, maximum 5% . Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% . Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM I-T104), maximum loss 12% . Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% ofthe stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs.lsq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs.lsq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabi_on baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 117 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gab ion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gab ions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor( s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: . Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; . Trash and debris removal from the job site; Section IV Techinical Specificaitons Page 118 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications . Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; . Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; . Proper fertilization and pest control oflandscape and palms (may be subcontracted); . Irrigation service and repair; . Mulch replacement; . Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the . Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the- particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 119 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at hislher expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 120 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11 :00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 121 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. -7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MilliNG OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 122 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S- Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 123 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MilLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 55.8 MilLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYM ENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal. of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 124 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. 57.2 BASIS OF PAYM ENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur di0xide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: . An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 125 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: . Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. . The date of the training, and . The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 690), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, and removal of existing traffic signal equipment. All mast arms signal installations shall meet the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm poles shall be chestnut bronze, with the color approved by the City prior to placement. All traffic signal indicators shall be LED's, approved by both the City and FDOT. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the, plans; ,-" 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 126 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer speCIes. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 127 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical. root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arb ori culture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. 1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to. the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 128 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. SectionlV Techinical Specificaitons Page 129 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: hUp:/ /www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity Issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. SectionIV Techinical Specificaitons Page 130 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I , I I I I I I I CITY OF CLEARWATER POST OFFICE Box 47'il-l, CI.I'AI(\XXIEI{, FI.(lIW),\ 33758-4748 :Xll:\IUI',\1. SEI{VH:!:S BI'II.III\I;, I()() SllI:TII ;\IYI\TI.E AVI:.'\I"I', CI.EARWATER, FI.OI\IIl.\ 337S(i TElYI'II()\E (/27) S(]2-4i)()O F.\\ (727) 562-4025 PAI{KS A\D RECI(i':'\TI( )\ DEI'ARHIE\T November 6, 2007 Prospective Bidders RE: PRE-QUALIFICATION TO BID, CITY OF CLEARWATER Dear Mr. Bixler: Attached per your request is a "QUALIFICATION APPLICATION OF PROSPECTIVE BIDDER" for the City of Clearwater's construction projects. Your attention is called to the following three (3) items which must accompany the application: a current financial statement completed within the past year, three letters of reference, and a list of major projects completed within the past year (each project is to include type of work, dollar volume, name and phone number of project representative or owner) . All of the above items must be received before review of the application can begin. For contractors interested in any particular project, the complete pre-qualification package must be received at least 14 days prior to the last day on which construction plans and specifications may be obtained by bidders. All qualifications must be met prior to purchasing of plans and specifications. Plans and specifications will not be sold to firms who have not met all qualifications. We appreciate your interest in the City of Clearwater and ask that you direct any questions concerning the pre-qualifying process to me at telephone (727) 562-4950 Ext. 7203. Sincerely, Gary A. Johnson, CGC Public Services Director /ae Attachment * "1\1I :,\1. E~ll'l.()Y~lE\T Ar\1l AFFIRMATIVE ACTIO\ E\lI;U lYEI\" I , I I I I I I I I I ^ } I I I I I I I I QUALIFICATION APPLICATION OF PROSPECTIVE BIDDER . CITY OF CLEARWATER CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS TO: City of Clearwater Construction Division Attn: Alice Eckman, Construction Office Specialist 410 N. Myrtle Avenue or (P.O. Box 4748, Clw. FL. 33758-4748) Clearwater, Florida 33755 DATE: PURPOSE: To provide the City with reasonable assurance that the prospective bidder on City of Clearwater formal construction contracts has the financial assets, resources, work force, and work experience to successfully complete contemplated construction contract agreements with the City. CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME: BUSINESS ADDRESS: CITY - STATE - ZIP CODE: PHONE NUMBER: FAX NUMBER: E-MAIL ADDRESS: TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (Individual, Corporation, Partnership, etc.) LIST ALL PRINCIPALS OF ORGANIZATION: (President, Vice-President, Secretary-Treasurer, Partner, etc.) DATE ORGANIZATION BEGAN UNDER PRESENT NAME: OTHER NAMES AND DATES UNDER WHICH ORGANIZA nON EXISTED: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I REFERENCES: CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE NUMBER: INDIVIDUAL HOLDING LICENSE: ISSUING AUTHORITY: CLASSIFICATION OF LICENSE: HAS YOUR FIRM EVER FAILED TO COMPLETE WORK AWARDED TO YOU? IF SO, WHERE AND WHY? NUMBER OF FULL TIME EMPLOYEE'S DIRECTLY ON APPLICANTS PAYROLL: PRESENT VALUE OF AND GENERAL TYPE OF ALL CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT DIRECTLY OWNED BY THE APPLICANT (INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MOST RECENT FINANCIAL STATEMENT & INCLUDE LONG TERM LEASE/PURCHASE EQUIPMENT): The pre-qualification to bid limitation is an amount of dollars equal to the amount of the largest single construction project which has been successfully completed by the Contractor. The pre-qualification amount is limited to the particular construction categories in which the Contractor is approved to perfonn work. This pre-qualification amount may be adjusted as the Contractor may successfully complete larger construction projects. The Contractor may exhibit where two or more similar projects were substantially accomplished by the Contractor at the same time where the aggregate amount of these projects in excess of the largest single project accomplished. This I I I I I I I I' I I , I I I I I I I I aggregate amount will be considered as the pre-qualification amount up to an amount equal to 150% of the largest single project amount. Pre-qualification amounts and categories may be limited as warranted by the City's experience with the Contractor's construction projects. LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR: 1. AMOUNT: $ 2. DATE OF COMPLETION: 3. TYPE OF WORK: 4. OWNERJREFERENCE: Telephone Number Address ALTERNATE PRE-QUALIFICATION AMOUNT IS BASED ON THE AGGREGATE TOTAL AMOUNT OF CONCURRENT PROJECTS COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITH A MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF 150% OF LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT LISTED ABOVE. LARGEST AGGREGATE AMOUNT COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WHERE WORK WAS PERFORMED AT THE SAME TIME: $ (Total aggregate amount determined from project list below) PROJECT 1 1. AMOUNT: $ 2. DATE OF START OF WORK: 3. DATE OF COMPLETION: 4. TYPE OF WORK: 5. OWNERJREPRESENT A TIVE: Telephone Number: Address: PROJECT 2 1. AMOUNT: $ 2. DATE OF START OF WORK: 3. DATE OF COMPLETION: 4. TYPE OF WORK: I I I I I' I I I I I , I I I I I I I I 5.0WNERlREPRESENTATIVE: Telephone Number: Address: PROJECT 3 1. AMOUNT: $ 2. DATE OF START OF WORK: 3. DATE OF COMPLETION: 4. TYPE OF WORK: 5.0WNERlREPRESENTATIVE: Telephone Number: Address: THE FOLLOWING THREE ADDITIONAL ITEMS ARE TO ACCOMPANY THIS APPLICATION: 1. A current Financial Statement for your company which will be returned uncopied upon completion of review. 2. A list of major projects completed (each project is to include type of work, dollar volume, name and phone number of project representative or owner). 3. Three letters of reference are requested from owners your company has performed work for. The reference letters shall be on the owner's letterhead and contain the following information: A.) Location and type of work. 8.) Dollar volume with your company. C.) Project owner's name, address & phone number. D.) Surety Company involved, if any. E.) Consulting Engineer or Architect, address and phone number. F.) Starting and completion dates. Pre-qualification is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully completed construction projects or extensive work in the category in conjunction with larger project work. Following are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre-qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check those categories for which your firm is seeking pre-qualification approval. To receive approval in a particular construction category, your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's completed project list as described above. In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources, and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient work force or insufficient resources will not be I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I I I I I I approved for pre-qualification or will not receive pre-qualification in particular work categories. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE RESURFACING..................... BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND MODIFICATION............... COMMERCIAL BUTI.-DINGS .............................. CONCRETE FLAT WORK (CURBS, WALKS, COURTS, ETC.).... DEMOLITION.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... EXCAVATION/SITE WORK/CHANNEL STABILIZATION GUNITE RESTORATION.............. ................... HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING. . . . . . . .. . . INDUSTRIAL PAINTING................................ LANDSCAPING & IRRIGATION .......................... MARINE CONSTRUCTION. ....... ........... ............. MARINE DREDGING.................................... ROADWAY AND PARKING LOT CONSTRUCTION............... SANITARY PUMP STATIONS............................. SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS.......................... TENNIS COURTS...................................... URBAN STREETS CAPE. ................................. WASTEWATER & WATER TREATMENT FACILITIES............ WATER AND FORCE MAINS.............................. WELL CONSTRUCTION.... ...... ............. ........... I I I I I I I I I 'I I I I I I I I I I THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE. FIRM: BY: (Please Type) SIGNATURE: TITLE: (Owner, President, etc.) DATE: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF CLEARWATER BEACH LffiRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples...................................................1 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK Section 02110 - Site Clearing..................................... ........ ........ ............ ......... ................... ...3 Section 02200 - Earthwork............................... .....................................................................8 Section 02280 - T erm.ite Contro1.................... ..... ...... ....................... ................ .....................2 Section 02513 - Asphalt Concrete Paving.............................................................................4 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03310 - Concrete Work................................. ............................................................4 DIVISION 4- MASONRY Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.. ............ ........... ........ ...... ............... ......... ................. .......... ..... 7 DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing ......................................................................3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06101 - Rough Carpentry......... ....... ...... ..................... ........................... .......... ..........5 Section 06192 - Prefabricated Wood Trusses .......................................................................4 Section 06201 - Finish Carpentry & Millwork................... ...................................................4 DIVISON 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07100 - Waterproofing..... ....... ........ ........ ......... ..... .......... .......... .............. ..................2 Section 07175 - Water Repellents........................... ....... ...... ...... ......... ......... ............... ....... ....2 Section 07193 - Elastic Sheet Vapor Barriers........................................................................2 Section 07200 - Insulation..... ..... ............ .............. ................. .... ......... ..... ....... .......................3 Section 07410 - Preformed Metal Roofmg ............................................................................4 Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Meta!...................... .................;....................................3 Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center Consolidation Specifications Table of Contents . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 07700 - Roof Specialties and Accessories.............. ..................................................2 Section 07715 - Gutters and Downspouts..............................................................................3 Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.... ...................... ....... ...... ........ ............... ........... ......... ...... .........6 DIVISION 8 - DOORS.. WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 08110 - Steel Doors & Frames..................................................................................4 Section 08210 - Wood Doors............ ...... ........... ......... ....... ...................... ...... ............ ............2 Section 08410 - Aluminum Doors, Frames and Storefront System.......................................6 Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows..... .......................... ..... ............. .......... .... .....................5 Section 08700 - Finish Hardware. ........ ...... .......... ...... . ........ ..... ..... .......... ...... ............ ......... ...6 Section 08711 - Hardware Schedule............................ .........................................................1 Section 08800 - Glass & Glazing.. ....... ................... .... ....... ..... ................. ............ ........ ..........5 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster.............................. .............................................................5 Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywal1............. ........ ....... ...................... .... ...... ..... ............ ........ .....5 Section 09300 - Tile.... ..................... ....... .......... ........ ............. ...... ............ ............. ........ .........5 Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings...... .... ........ .... ....... ...... ....... .............. .......... ................. ...4 Section 09623 - Water Repellents and Graffiti Resistant Coatings ......................................7 Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring.... ........ ................. .................. ............ ............. ........ ........4 Section 09680 - Carpeting. .............. ........ ..... ........... .............. ................ .............. ........ ..........3 Section 09800 - Special Coatings..... ........ ..... ...... ........ ..... ...... ........... ....... ............. ......... .......4 Section 09900 - Painting.... ..... ..... ........ ............... .. ..... .............................. ......... ............ .........6 Section 09901 - Painting Schedule............................. ...........................................................10 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10155 - Toilet Compartments............................. ......................................................5 Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories..... ........... ............ ..... ......... .... ............... .............. .............2 Section 10905 - Miscellaneous Specialties ...........................................................................3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15400 - Plumbing.... ............... ....... ........... ...... .......... .................... ..... ............... ........6 Section 15500 - Air Conditioning, Heating & Ventilating ....................................................7 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16000 - Electrical. ......... ...... ....... .................. ............. .... ............. .......... ........ .......... ...9 Section 16720 - Fire Alarm and Detection System...............................................................2 Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center Consolidation Specifications Table of Contents I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~ I SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and distributing Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples as necessary after as well as before approval. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the number of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples which the Contractor need submit and, if necessary, re-submit, is as follows: In the Case of Shop Drawings, such as for structural steel and steel joints, millwork, hollow metal doors and frames, window walls, storefronts, etc., submit ONE REPRODUCffiLE SEPIA TRANSPARENCY and TWO PRINTS of each drawing. The Architect will retain the print for his file and will return the sepia to the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for making and distributing his required prints of the approved drawings from the sepia transparencies. In the case of Product Data, such as illustrations, manufacturer's catalog sheets, schedules, etc., submit the number that the Contractor requires to be returned plus THREE which will be retained by the Architect. In the case of Samples, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the number which the Contractor need submit and, if necessary, re-submit, is ONE which the Architect will retain, ONE which the Architect will return to the Contractor for him to maintain at the job site, PLUS the number that the Contractor requires to be returned for his use and distribution. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples that are not stamped or otherwise clearly identified as having been reviewed and approved by the Contractor shall be immediately returned to the Contractor prior to Architect's review. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall indicate the name of the Project; description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete identification of locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall be accompanied with transmittal letter containing Project name, Contractor's name, number of drawings, titles, and other pertinent data. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all dimensions and quantities shown unless verification of questionable dimensions or quantities are requested from the Architect due to conflict or inconsistency of the Contract Documents. Verification of field measurements or conditions shall remain the responsibility ofthe Contractor. END OF SECTION SHOP ORA WINGS. PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340-1 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of site clearing is shown on Drawings. B. SITE CLEARING INCLUDES, but is not limited to: 1. Protection of existing trees. 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil stripping. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Removing above-grade improvements. 6. Removing below-grade improvements. C. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Earthwork: Section 02200. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS: 1. Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 2. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 3. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction. B. PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES AND VEGETATION: 1. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. SITE CLEARING 02110-1 I I 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. 2. Water trees and other. vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. 3. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2" diameter cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 4. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction operations, in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ qualified tree surgeon to repair damages to trees and shrubs. 5. Replace trees which cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by tree surgeon. 6. Where it is apparent, due to proximity of building or other improvements, that a tree marked "to remain" will sustain considerable root damage, consult Architect for instructions before proceeding. C. SALVABLE IMPROVEMENTS: 1. Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING: A. GENERAL: 1. Remove vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with installation of new construction. Remove such items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out stumps and roots. 2. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots and branches obstruct new construction. B. TOPSOIL REMOVAL: 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. 2. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. 3. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance to prevent damage to main root system. 4. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown or where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles if require to prevent wind-blown dust. SITE CLEARING 02110-2 5. Dispose of topsoil off-site which cannot be reused as top soil. C. CLEARING AND GRUBBING: 1. Clean site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to be left standing. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 4. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. D. REMOVAL OF IMPROVEMENTS: 1. Remove above-grade and below-grade improvements necessary to permit construction, and other work as indicated and as required. 2. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be shown on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of those sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is included under this section. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: A. REMOVAL FROM OWNER'S PROPERTY: 1. Remove waste materials and unsuitable and excess topsoil from Owner's property and dispose of off site. END OF SECTION SITE CLEARING 02110-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I il I I I I I ,I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of earthwork is shown on the drawings. 1. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is included as part of this work. 2. Excavating and backfilling of utility trenches in building and within 5' outside building lines is included as part of this work. B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02110. 2. Utility Trenching (Outside 5' from the building lines): Mech/Elec Divisions or other sections requiring such work. 3. Concrete Paving: Section 02514. 4. Asphalt Concrete Paving: Section 02513. 5. Concrete Work: Section 03310. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. CODES AND STANDARDS: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICE: Employ, at Contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. TEST REPORTS: Submit 1 copy of following test reports directly to Architect from the testing and inspection service, with copy to Contractor. 1. Test reports on borrow material. 2. Field density test reports. 3. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. 4. Verification of suitability of footing subgrades. EARTHWORK 02200-1 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. SITE INFORMATION: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are available for review at office of Architect, but are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data are made available for convenience of Contractor. 1. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. B. EXISTING UTILITIES: Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active. C. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. Protect trees, shrubs and other planting to remain after project is complete. Do not stock pile soil or cause unnecessary compaction or removal of soil within the root area of trees to remain on the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERlALS: BACKFILL AND FILL MA TERlALS: Provide acceptable soil materials for backfill and fill. Provide relatively clean sand free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetable and other deleterious matter, and with no more than 5% of total material passing the #200 sieve. Soil materials must be approved by testing and inspection service. EARTHWORK 02200-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. DO NOT START WORK UNTIL SOIL TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICE has been established, notified, and an inspector present at site. 3.02 EXCAVATION: A. EXCA VA TION consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required grade elevations. B. STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS: 1. Slope the sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. C. SHORING AND BRACING: 1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition. 2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. D. DEWATERING: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into the excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey the water away from excavations. 3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits. Do not use trench exactions as temporary drainage ditches. E. MATERIAL STORAGE: 1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. EARTHWORK 02200-3 2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. F. EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATIONS: 1. Conform to the elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10'. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb the bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to the required lines and grades to leave a solid base to receive concrete. G. EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS: 1. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown. H. EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES: 1. Dig trenches to uniform width required for the particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. 3. Grade bottoms of trenches as required, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 4. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. 5. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe system. 3.03 COMPACTION: A. GENERAL: Control soil compaction during fill and backfill for compliance with percentage of density specified for each area classification. Recommendations for subgrade preparations contained in the Soils Investigation Reports, if any, shall be complied with. Compaction shall be carefully observed and tested by testing and inspection service. B. PERCENTAGE OF MAXIMUM DENSITY REQUIREMENTS: Compact soil to not less than following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well- defmed moisture density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor Density). EARTHWORK 02200-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer ofbackfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. 2. Building Slabs: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each 4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. 5. Pavements: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. C. MOISTURE CONTROL: 1. Where sub grade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. a. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.04 BACKFILL AND FILL: A. GENERAL: 1. In all excavations and under building slabs, and under walks and pavements use satisfactory excavated or borrow material that has been sampled, tested and approved by soil testing agency. 2. Under grassed areas, use excavated or borrow material. 3. Spread 12 inches of topsoil material (stockpiled under Section 02110) over top of landscaped areas. 4. Fi11landscaped planter islands with 12 inches of topsoil. B. PRIOR TO BACKFILL PLACEMENT: Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following. 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. C. GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that :fill material will bond with existing surface. EARTHWORK. 02200-5 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to the percentage of maximum dry density. D. PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION: 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more thanl2" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten each layer as necessary to provide the optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to the required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 4. Take care to insure that backfill around foundation excavations and in trenches beneath slabs-on-grade or pavements is properly placed and compacted. 3.05 GRADING: A. GENERAL: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. Bring grades to finish elevations given minus clearance for construction which is to be placed on the grade at the various locations. B. GRADING OUTSIDE BUILDING LINES: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding of water. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10" above or below the required subgrade elevations. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below the required subgrade elevation. C. GRADING SURF ACE OF FILL UNDER BUILDING SLABS: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10' straightedge. D. COMPACTION: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. EARTHWORK 02200-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.06 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE: A. GENERAL: 1. Subbase course consists of placing subbase material, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade to support a pavement base course. a. See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. B. GRADE CONTROL: 1. During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of subbase course. C. SHOULDERS: 1. Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12" width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of subbase course. D. PLACING: 1. Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: Testing service must inspect, take field density tests and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed thereon. B. MINIMUM NUMBER OF DENSITY TESTS: 1. Building area: 1 for every 3000 to 5000 square feet of subgrade and compacted fill layer. 2. Pavement areas: I for every 10,000 square feet of subgrade and compacted fill layer. 3. Backfilling of trenches: 1 for every 50 lineal feet. C. IF, based on testing service reports and inspections, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at Contractor's expense. 3.08 MAINTENANCE: A. PROTECTION OF GRADED AREAS: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas. EARTHWORK 02200-7 EARTHWORK 02200-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. RECONDITIONING COMPACTED AREAS: Where completed areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, re-shape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. 3.09 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS: A. REMOVE EXCESS excavated material, trash, debris and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 02280 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. PROVIDE SOIL TREATMENT for termite control as herein specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. IN ADDITION TO THE REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. B. ENGAGE APROFESSIONAL PESTCONTROL OPERATOR, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. RESTRICTIONS: 1. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed. 2. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of soil toxicant manufacturer. 1.05 GUARANTEE: SUBMIT 2 COPIES of written guarantee certifying that chemicals having the required concentration and rate of application as hereinafter specified have been applied and that soil poisoning treatment will prevent attack by subterranean termites for a period of not less than 5 years, and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during guarantee period, Contractor will retreat soil and also repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. This guarantee shall be secured by a Repair Bond in the amount of $50,000 minimum for each occurrence and shall include provisions for Owner to renew Bond for an additional 10 years on a yearly basis. TERMITE CONTROL 02280-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION: A. USE AN EMULSffiLE CONCENTRATE INSECTICIDE for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a working solution of one of the following chemical elements and concentrations: 1. Chioropyrifos ("Dursban- TC"); 1.0% in water emulsion. 2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", Torpeo"); 0.5% in water emulsion. B. OTHER SOLUTIONS may be used as recommended by Applicator and if acceptable to local governing authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. REMOVE FOREIGN MATTER which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. B. APPLY SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION at following minimum rate: 1. Within building area, with or without slabs-on grade, at rate of one gallon per 10 square feet. 2. Outside building perimeter, under aprons, pads, or paved extensions, at rate of one gallon per 5 square feet. 3. At hollow masonry foundations treat voids at rate of one gallon per 5 lineal feet, poured directly into hollow spaces. 4. At control joints, along both sides of foundation walls and areas where slab will be penetrated, at rate of 2 gallons per 5 lineal feet of penetration. C. ALLOW DRYING TIMEafter application of not less than 12 hours before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities. D. POST SIGNS in areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. E. REAPPLY SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION to areas disturbed by subsequent Excavation or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION TERMITE CONTROL 02280-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 02513 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of asphalt concrete paving (ASCON-PV) work is shown on the Drawings. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS: A. FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (FDOT), "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction", 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICE: The Contractor shall select and pay for an independent testing laboratory to provide and pay for field quality control testing specified herein. Testing laboratory shall mail copies of each report directly to the Architect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. CERTIFICATION: Before installation Contractor shall submit Certification that Base Course Aggregate and Asphalt Concrete to be installed in project will comply with FDOT Specifications Section and Type as specified in this section. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. WEATHER LIMITATIONS: Apply prime and tack coats only when ambient temperature is above 50oF., and when temperature has not been below 350F. for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture. B. CONSTRUCT ASPHALT CONCRETE SURF ACE COURSE only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees F. and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30 degrees F. and rising. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02513-1 C. GRADE CONTROL: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. BASE COURSE AGGREGATE: Provide the following: 1. Limerock base (FOOT Section 911). B. ASPHALT CONCRETE Comply with FDOT Specifications, Section 333, Type III with minimum Marshall Stability of750 lbs. C. PRIME COAT: Cut-back asphalt grade RC-70 or RC-250. D. TACK COAT: Emulsified asphalt grade RS-2, SS-1 or SS-1H. E. WHEEL STOPS: Provide precast concrete wheel stops where indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturer's standard design with holes for anchoring with 5/8" round steel bars (2) driven through stop into paving. F. STRIPING PAINT: Chlorinated-rubber base traffic lane-marking paint, factory- mixed, quick-drying, and non-bleeding, complying with FS-TT-P-115, Type III. Colors as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. CONDITIONS AND AREAS must be examined under which paver is to install asphalt concrete paving. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Paver. 3.02 PAVEMENT BASE COURSE: A. GENERAL: Base course consists of specified thickness, over subgrade concrete placement. B. BASE COURSE: Install as per FOOT automobile parking lot areas, roadways and unloading areas. shall be as required by FOOT, authority. 1. Limerock Base, FDOT Section 200 placing base material, in surface to support asphalt Specifications, 4" thickness in 6" thickness in truck delivery Base thickness in right-of-ways County or other applicable ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02513-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. COMPACT BASE COURSE to at least 95 percent (ASTM D-1557). 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. REMOVE ALL LOOSE MATERIAL from compacted base surface immediately before applying prime coat. B. PROOF ROLL prepared base surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. C. PRIME COAT: Apply at the rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gallon per square yard over compacted subgrade. Apply material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile. D. TAC~ COAT: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete pavement. Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallon per square yard of surface. 3.04 ASPHALT CONCRETE: A. GENERAL: Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface in accordance with FOOT Specifications, Section 330. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand. Compact to minimum of 92% of laboratory compacted density. Place each course to required grade, cross-section. Place to a compacted depth of not less than 1 inch thickness. Thickness in right-of-ways shall be as required by FOOT, County or other applicable authority. B. JOINTS: Make joints between successive days' work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. 3.05 ROLLING: A. GENERAL: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Perform breakdown, second and fmish rolling in accordance with FOOT Specifications, Section 330. B. COMPACT MIXTURE with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. C. PATCHING: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective area. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and smoothness. D. PROTECTION: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02513-3 has cooled and hardened. E. ERECT BARRICADES to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled and attained its maximum degree of hardness. 3.06 TRAFFIC AND LANE MARKINGS: A. CLEANING: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. Surfaces must be dust free and dry prior to application of paint. B. APPL Y TRAFFIC PAINT with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply in 2 coats, allowing sufficient time for 1 st coat to dry thoroughly before applying 2nd coat. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. GENERAL: Testing and Inspection Service will test the in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirements of thickness and surface smoothness. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Architect. B. TESTS FOR DENSITY AND THICKNESS: In-place compacted thickness will not be acceptable if less than the required thickness or density. 1. Base Course Thickness and Density: Test base course prior to placing of surface course. Make minimum of 8 tests at locations determined by Architect. 2 Surface Course Thickness: Make minimum of 8 tests at locations determined by Architect. C. SURFACE SMOOTHNESS: Test finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using IO'straightedge applied to paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding tolerances for smoothness of 3/8". END OF SECTION ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 02513-4 I -I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03310 CONCRETE WORK PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-l Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: A. PROVIDE ALL LABOR, materials and equipment necessary to complete all concrete poured-in-place (including all related work and/or services) as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. CODES AND STANDARDS: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings or specified herein, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building" (ACI 301).ACI 301 shall be supplemented by the following section numbers of ACI 301: 1. 3.2 - Strength: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. 5.2 - Reinforcing steel as herein specified. 3. ACI-318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". B. TESTING: The Contractor shall not make tests with his own forces. All testing shall be by a Testing Laboratory approved by the Architect before any concrete is poured for the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS; REINFORCEMENT: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Submitted shop drawings shall be checked and signed by the Ge~eral Contractor. B. Proposed mix designs; submit proposed mix designs for each class of concrete according to ACI 301 Chapter 3, Method 1 or 2. CONCRETE WORK 03310-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. REINFORCING STEEL shall be domestic steel conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. Welded steel wire fabric (WWF): ASTM A185. B. READY -MIXED CONCRETE: ready-mixed concrete small miscellaneous approved by Architect. All concrete for this project shall be in accordance with ASIM C 94 except for amounts mixed in procedure and proportions C. CONCRETE MATERIALS: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise specified. Provide aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete. 2. Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout, Type D,non-metallic. 3. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Federal Spec TT-C-800, Type 1. Do not use on slabs or other horizontal surfaces. D. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: 1. Slump Limits: Proportion and design concrete slump at point of placement of 4 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) except provide not more than 3 inch slump for ramps and sloping surfaces. 2. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The test facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 3. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Architect. 4. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the properties as indicated on drawings and schedules. 5. Admixtures: None without prior approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. COOPERATE WITH OTHER TRADES to coordinate all openings and placement of embedded items which are required to be furnished and/or placed under those sections of the Project Manual pertaining to those applicable trades. CONCRETE WORK 03310-2 I I I I I I I , I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: 1. General: Protect fresWy placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 2. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and fmishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end offmal curing period. B. REMOVAL OF FORMS: 1. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, wall, columns, and similar parts of the work may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 Deg. F (10 deg. C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 2. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. 3. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.03 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. A SEPARATE TESTING LABORATORY shall be employed by the Contractor, acceptable to Architect, to perform all concrete field tests and to submit test reports directly to Architect. Concrete shall be sampled as follows: 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 2. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. 3. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in anyone day or for each 2,500 sq ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 173; volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 5. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and below, and when 80 deg. F (27 deg. C) and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made; record air temperature. CONCRETE WORK 03310-3 B. TEST RESULTS SHALL BE REPORTED IN WRITING to Architect, Structural Engineer, and Contractor on same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing service, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28-day tests. C. ADDITIONAL TESTS: The testing service shall make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. The testing service shall conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. D. WATER IS NOT AUTHORIZED to be added to ready-mixed concrete at the project site. If unauthorized water is added, the testing laboratory shall make a set of compressive test specimens and slump test after the addition of water and report the fact to the Architect immediately. 3.04 FINISHING: A. SLABS INTERIOR: Steel trowel to a hard, dense finish. B. SLABS EXTERIOR: Light broom finish. END OF SECTION CONCRETE WORK 03310-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL: 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-i Specification sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of each type of masonry work is shown on Drawings and in schedules. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. JOB MOCK-UP: 1. Prior to installation of brick masonry work, erect sample wall panel mock-up using materials, bond and joint tooling required for final work. Build mock-up at the site, where directed, approximately 4' x 4' ,indicating proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in completed work. 2. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities of mock-up before start of masonry work. 3. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed. 4. At Contractor's option, mock-up may be a portion of permanent wall. B. FIRE PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS: Where fIre-resistance ratings are required for unit masonry work, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization or by another means, as acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SAMPLES: Submit, for approval, 2 sets of samples (minimum of 6 brick in each set) of brick required. Include in each set full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusive responsibility of Contractor. B. TEST REPORTS: Submit test reports or letter certifying brick compliance with specification requirements. UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. PROTECTION OF WORK: During erection, cover top of wall with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress and to protect masonry cores from rain. B. STAINING: Prevent grout or mortar from staining face of masonry to be left exposed 'or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL: A. MANUFACTURER: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. B. MASONRY UNIT CHARACTERISTICS: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated. 2.02 BRICK: A. PROVIDE FACING BRICK meeting or exceeding the requirements for ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS. B. SIZE, TEXTURE AND COLOR: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU): A. SIZE: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. Width shown on Drawings. B. SPECIAL SHAPES: Providewhere shown and where required for lintels, comers, jambs, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. C. PROVIDE NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATE HOLLOW LOAD-BEARING eMU units complying with ASTM C 90 Grade N-i with a compressive strength of not less than 1500 PSI (Net Section Area). D. WHERE FIRE-RESISTANCE RATINGS are required for unit masonry work, provide "Solite" unit masonry that complies with ASTM C-90 Grade N-l or ASTM C-145 Grade N -1 as necessary to provide load bearing capacity required and the fire ratings required. UNIT MASONRY 04200-2 I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.04 PRECAST LINTELS AND SILLS A. PRECAST LINTEL BEAMS, using 5,000 p.s.i. concrete, where employed over openings, shall have not less than eight (8) inches bearing at each end on the masonry blockwork. Lintels for openings exceeding four (4) feet wide but not exceeding eight (8) feet wide, shall be eight (8) inches wide by eight (8) inches deep, and contain two (2) No.6 bars top and bottom. Precast lintel beams shall be provided with No.3 stinups at eight (8) inch spacing. B. PRECAST SILLS shall be of size and shape as shown on the drawings, placed in full bed of mortar level and true. 2.05 MORTAR MATERIALS: A. PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. HYDRATED LIME: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. SAND: ASTM C 144. D. WATER: Clean and potable. 2.06 MASONRY ACCESSORIES: A. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING AND TIES FOR MASONRY: 1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10' with matching corner ("L") and intersecting ("T") units. Fabricate from cold- drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and not less than 1/2" elsewhere. Provide the following type of joint reinforcing unless otherwise indicated. (a) Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" O.c. (b) Number of side rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry. For multi- wythe masonry, one side rod for each brick wythe and one side rod for each face sheet of each concrete masonry wythe. 2. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9-gage side and cross rods. 3. Wire Finish: (a) For exterior walls hot-dip galvanize joint reinforcing after fabrication to comply with ASTM A i53, Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft.). (b) For interior walls provide manufacturer's standard mill galvanized fInish. B. INDIVIDUAL WIRE TIES FOR MASONRY: 1. Fabricate from 3/16" cold-drawn steel wire, ASTM A 82, unless otherwise indicated, of the length required for proper embedment in wythes or masonry. UNIT MASONRY 04200-3 (a) For use with hollow masonry units laid cells vertical, provide rectangular shaped ties. (b) For use with solid masonry units, provide ties with ends bent to 90 degree angles to form hooks not less than 2" long. (c) Where spacing and back-up joints do not align, provide either offset or adjustable 2-piece ties. 2. For exterior walls, fabricate from steel wire with 1.5 oz. hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153 Class B-2. C. ANCHORS AND TIES: 1. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Where shown on Drawings provide corrugated metal ties not less than 22 ga. and not less than 7/8" wide and 7" long with one end crimped for attachment to substrate. Size to extend to within 3/4" of face of masonry veneer. 2. For interior work, fabricate from steel with mill galvanized or hot-dip coating. 3. For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot-dip galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class B-2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. THICKNESS: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. CUT MASONRY UNITS with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. C. WET CLAY BRICK having ASTM C 67 absorption rates greater than 0.025 oz. per square inch per minute. 1. Determine absorption by drawing a circle the size of a quarter on typical units and place 20 drops of water inside the circle. 2. Wet brick units only if water is absorbed within 1-112 minutes. D. DO NOT WET concrete masonry units. E. PATTERN BOND: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centeredon units in courses above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe bonded by lapping not less than 2inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. F. LAY OUT WALLS IN ADVANCE for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-size units at comers, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. G. LAY-UP WALLS plumb and true and with course level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. H. STOPPING AND RESUMING WORK: Rack back i/2-masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. I. BUILT-IN WORK.: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3.02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING: A. MORTAR MIXES: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specifications, and of the following types. 1. Use Type S mortar for exterior above grade loadbearing and non-loading walls, parapet walls, pavements, and for interior loadbearing walls. 2. Use Type N mortar for interior non-Ioadbearing partitions. B. BATCH CONTROL: 1. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not be permitted. 2. Mix mortars with the maximum amount of water consistent with workability to provide maximum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar. 3. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use water clear and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2-112 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-112 hour period as required to restore workability. C. LAY BRICK AND OTHER SOLID MASONRY UNITS with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. D. LA Y HOLLOW CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face sheets; also bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls. E. JOINTS: Maintain joint widthsshown, except for minor variations required to maintain UNIT MASONRY 04200-5 bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8 inch joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. F. REMOVE MASONRY UNITS DISTURBED after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound comers at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.03 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING: A. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing except as otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofmg, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. B. SPACE CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL REINFORCING at 16 inches o.c. vertically unless otherwise shown. 3.04 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK: A. PROVIDE ANCHORING DEVICES of the type shown and as specified. Ifnot shown or specified, provide standard type for facing and back-up involved. B. ANCHOR MASONRY to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following: 1. Space anchors vertically and as shown, but not more than 24 inches o.c. 36 inches o.c. horizontally. C. ANCHOR SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY VENEER to backing with metal ties as follows: 1. Anchor embedded Provide indicated. 2. Anchor veneer to concrete back-up with dovetail anchors. 3. Space veneer anchors as shown, or if not shown, space not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally. Provide additional anchors within l' -0" of openings and space not more than 3' -0" around perimeter. 4. Anchor veneer to masonry back-up with two-piece wall anchors spaced not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally. Provide additional anchors within l' -0" of openings and space not more than 3' -0" around perimeter. UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.05 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING: A. REMOVE AND REPLACE EXPOSED-TO-VIEW MASONRY UNITS which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. REMOVE AND REPLACE CONCEALED-FROM-VIEW MASONRY UNITS which are loose, broken, or similarly damaged. Provide new units and install in fresh mortar or grout. C. POINTING: During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at comers, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. D. CLEAN EXPOSED BRICK MASONRY SURF ACES by the bucket and brush hand cleaning method or by high pressure washing method. 1. Use commercial cleaning agents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. CLEAN EXPOSED CMU by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after fmal pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY 04200-7 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of cold-formed metal framing, including structural metal studs, is shown on drawings. B. TYPES of cold-formed metal framing units include the following: 1. "C" shaped steel studs. C. COLD-FORMED metal framing specified in this section is for interior application, exterior application and roof trusses. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. COMPONENT DESIGN: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with AlSI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". B. MANUFACTURER: Provide cold-formed metal framing components of type(s) indicated, produced by one of the following or equivalent: 1. "C"-shaped load bearing studs and joists, 1-5/8" flange: a. Inryco/Milcor. b. Bostwick. c. U.S. Gypsum. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's product information and installation instructions for each item of cold-formed framing and accessories. B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental bracing, COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMlNG 05400-1 splices, accessories, and details as may be required for proper installation. 2. Submitted shop drawings shall be checked and signed by the General Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. PROTECT METAL FRAMING UNITS from rusting and damage. Deliver to the project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FRAMING: A. SYSTEM COMPONENTS: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standardsteel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. MATERIALS AND FINISHES: 1. 16 gage and heavier units. Fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446. 2. For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611. 3. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 for minimum G 60 coating. C. "C"-SHAPE STUDS: Manufacturer's standard load-bearing steel studs of size, shape, and gage indicated, with 1.625" flange and flange return lip. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. GENERAL: Framingcomponents may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. B. FASTENINGS: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with the manufacturer. 1. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: Install cold-formed metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Runner Tracks: install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to the layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power-driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at comers and ends of tracks. 2. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. 3. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. 4. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, and similar work requiring attachment. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. B. INSTALLATION OF STUD SYSTEM: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. 1. Frame openings larger than 2'.0" square with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs. Secure stud system at perimeter as required. 2. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, as shown for wall system, with a separate stud and do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. 3. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 4' .6" o.c. Weld at each intersection. C. FIELDP AINTING: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during handling and installation. Use galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 06101 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and wWch is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Types of work in this section include, but are not necessary limited to, rough carpentry for: 1. Wood grounds, nailers, framing and blocking. 2. Wood furring. 3. Sheathing. 4. Wood roof trusses. 5. Exposed rafters. B. FINISH CARPENTRY is specified in another section within Division 6. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings of wood trusses signed and sealed by registered structural engineer. Indicate species and stress grades of lumber to be used and details of metal connectors to be used at joints. Show pitch, span and location of trusses. Provide large scale details of typical connections and anchorages. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. COORDINATION: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: A. LUMBER STANDARDS: Comply with PS 20. B. PLYWOOD STANDARD: ComplywithPS l/ANSI-A199.1 andAPA. C. FACTORY-MARK each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. LUMBER, GENERAL: 1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. WOOD ROOF TRUSSES: 1. Provide wood roof trusses designed and fabricated in accordance with AITC and TPI specifications. 2. Design Loads: Total load, 45 p.s.f. which includes 10 p.s.f. ceiling load. 3. Submit shop drawings for wood roof trusses which have been designed, signed and sealed by structural engineer registered to practice in the state where project is located. A minimum of one (1) complete set of shop drawings shall bear engineer's original signature and raised seal. C. EXPOSED RAFTERS: Provide framing lumber complying with the following: 1. Provide preservative treated lumberas specified herein under title of Wood Treatment" . 2. Provide Select Structural Grade lumber of either Hem-Fir per WWPA rules or Southern Pine per SPIB rules. 3. Provide rough sawn finish on all exposed surfaces. D. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER: 1. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: 2. Grade: No.2 pine (SPill). E. PLYWOOD: 1. Concealed Plywood: Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide the following: a. Provide Exterior Type plywood for exterior use and Interior Type with ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I exterior glue for interior use. b. . Provide C-D/Ext-AP A plywood for exterior use; provide C-D/Int-AP A plywood for interior use, unless otherwise shown. c. For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant treated plywood with exterior glue. 2. Exposed Plywood: Where plywood will be exposed, provide "A" type surface on exposed surfaces. Provide exterior glue. F. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and fInish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal SpecifIcations for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of size and type recommended by manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 2. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, ASTM D 226. 3. Hurricane Clips: Provide appropriate hurricane clips as recommended for installation condition by Heckman or equal products as approved. Provide 18 gage galvanized clips except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for each different condition. 3.03 WOOD TREATMENT: A. PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT: Where lumber of plywood is indicated as "PT", "Trt-Wd", or "Treated", or is specified to be treated, comply with. applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item to comply with the A WPB Quality Mark requirements. 1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with A WPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15% for plywood and 19% for lumber. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofIng, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproof mg. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. B. FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT: Where fIre-retardant treated wood is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fIre-retardant chemicals to comply with A WP A C20 and C27, as applicable for interior and exterior applications. Identify lumber with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. CUTS AFTER TREATMENT: Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with A WP A-M4. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. DISCARD UNITS OF MATERIAL with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. SET CARPENTRY WORK. accurately to required levels and lines, with members of plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. C. SECURELY A IT ACH CARPENTRY WORK. to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. 3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS AND BLOCKING: A. PROVIDE WHEREVER SHOWN and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. ' B. A IT ACH TO SUBSTRATES as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. PROVIDE PERMANENT GROUNDS of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. D. PROVIDE MINIMUM 2" X 8" WOOD BLOCKING extending between metal and wood studs and securely fastened at each end for the mounting of all toilet room accessories, sinks, toilet partitions and other wall -mounted items. 3.03 WOOD FURRING (Wd-Fur): A. INSTALL PLUMB AND LEVEL with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. B. FURRING TO RECEIVE GYPSUM DRYWALL: Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 x 2" furring at 16" o.c. vertically. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (Pwd): ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-4 I I I I I I I I- I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A. COMPLY. with recommendations of American Plywood Association (AP A), for installation of plywood. B. SHEATHING: Install as recommended by AP A for spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work. Provide thickness shown, or if not shown, provide thickness recommended by AP A. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 06192 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION: Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected members which are fabricated from dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the job site. B. EXTENT of wood trusses is indicated on drawings and specified herein. C. RELATED WORK: 1. Roof Sheathing: Section 06100. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. TPI STANDARDS: Comply with application requirements and recommendations ofthe following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications. 1. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". 2. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses". 3. "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses". 4. "Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses". 5. "Quality Control Manual". B. WOOD STRUCTURAL DESIGN STANDARD: Comply with applicable requirements of ''National Design Specification for Wood Construction" published by N.F.P.A. C. LUMBER STANDARD: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective grading inspecting agencies for species and grade of lumber indicated. D. CONNECTOR PLATE MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide truss Connector plates manufactured by a firm which is a member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality Control Manual". PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-1 E. FABRICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide trusses by a fIrm which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses similar to type indicated and which complies with the following requirements for quality control: 1. Fabricator practices a quality control program which complies with, or is comparable to, one published in TPI "Quality Control Manual", and which involves inspection by an independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. F. DESIGN: Trusses shall be designed so that no horizontal reactions are imposed on the supporting structure under vertical loads. 1. Truss members and connections shall be designed for all live, dead, and wind loads, plus any concentrated ioads shown on the drawings. Duration Factors: RoofDL + LL + WL RoofDL + LL 1.33 1.25 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. GENERAL: Submit following items as specified in Section (01340). B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication process, treatment (if any), handling and erection. 1. Submit certificate, signed by an officer of fabricating finn, indicating that trusses to be supplied for project comply with indicated requirements. C. SHOP DRA WINGS: Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design value, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage details. 1. Provide shop drawings which have been signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the state the project is located. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. HANDLE AND STORE TRUSSES with care, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure. B. TIME DELIVERY and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. LUMBER: 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency. 2. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide seasoned lumber with a maximum moisture content at time of dressed of 15%. 4. Lumber Species: Southern Pine, graded by SPIB. 5. Lumber Grade: For species indicated, provide the following stress-rated grade: "Selected Structural". B. METAL CONNECTOR PLATES, FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES: 1. Connector Plate Material: Metal complying with following requirements, unless otherwise indicated; not less than "0.036" thick, coated thickness. Provide connector plates from a single manufacturer. 2. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, Coating 060. 3. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish indicated, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, screws, bolts, nuts and washers and anchoring devices. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. CUT TRUSS MEJ\.1BERS to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units. B. FABRICATE METAL CONNECTOR PLATES to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details required for types of joint designs indicated. C. ASSEMBLE TRUSS MEJ\.1BERS in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniform and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated. D. CONNECT TRUSS MEMBERS by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION: A. GENERAL: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss Plate Institute. PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-3 B. ERECT TRUSSES with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacings indicated. C. HOIST UNITS in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members of joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. E. ANCHOR TRUSSES securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. F. INSTALL PERMANENT BRACING and related components to enable trusses to maintaindesign spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. G. DO NOT CUT or remove truss members. END OF SECTION PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-4 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 06201 FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION: Finish carpentry and millwork includes work which is exposed to view, is non-structural, and which is not specified as part of other sections. Types of work in this section include: 1. Wood trim. 2. Casework and countertops. B. RELATED WORK: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Builders Hardware and Wood Doors: Division 8. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. FACTORY-MARK EACH PIECE of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. B. A WI QUALITY STANDARD: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute .(A WI), except as otherwise indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Submit shop drawings for the following: 1. Casework. B. SAMPLES: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or pattern of finish carpentry and millwork. 1. Plastic Laminate: 1 piece, 3" x 5". FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK 06201-1 2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware: 1 unit of each type and finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: A. SOFTWOOD LUMBER STANDARDS: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. B. PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS-l/ANSI-AI99.l and APA. C. HARDWOOD LUMBER STANDARDS Comply with National Hardware Lumber Association (NHLA) rules. D. HARDWOOD PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS 51. E. PLASTIC LAMINATE: Comply with NEMA LD-3 for type, thickness, color, pattern and finish indicated for each application, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard products. F. WOODWORK STANDARD: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute (A WI) "Custom Quality Standards" unless otherwise indicated. 1. For following types of woodwork comply with indicated standards as applicable: a. Standing and Running Trim: A WI Section 300. b. Casework and Countertops:A WI Section 400. G. CASEWORK HARDWARE STANDARD: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI-156.9 "American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware". 1. Quality Level: Type 2 (institutional), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locks: Where indicated (if any), provide standard pin-type or disc-type (5 pins or discs) tumbler locks, keyed individually except as otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Hardware Finish: Provide hardware with BHMA Code 626 satin chromium plate finish (US26D). 2.02 MATERIALS GENERAL: A. NOMINAL SIZES are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated. B. MOISTURE CONTENT OF LUMBER: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than values required by the applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. FINISH CARPENTRY & MILL WORK 06201-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. LUMBER FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH: Use pieces made of solid lumber stock. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the proper type, size, material and finish for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications. 1. Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. DISCARD UNITS of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, nor adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns. B. INSTALL WORK PLUMB, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces. C. SCRIBE AND CUT WORK TO FIT adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts~ D. TRIM: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at comers, to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 1. Make exterior joints water-resistant by careful fitting. E. CASEWORK: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. F. ANCHOR FINISH CARPENTRY WORK to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK 06201-3 3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION: A. REPAIR DAMAGED AND DEFECTIVE WORK wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace work. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. CLEAN WORK ON EXPOSED and semi-exposed surfaces. PROTECTION: Installer of work shall advise Contractor of final protection to maintain conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY & MILL WORK 06201-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07100 WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of waterproof coating is indicated on the Drawings and by provisions of this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS': A. SUBSTRATE: Proceed with work of this section only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. WEATHER: Proceed with work of this section only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: PROVIDE waterproof coating equal to Thoroseal with Acryl-60 mixed and applied as recommended by manufacturer for applicable conditions. (White color.) WATERPROOFING 07100-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER must examine substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE: A. CLEAN SUBSTRATE of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. APPLICATION: Apply two coats of waterproof coating as recommended by manufacturer. Second coat shall be sponge applied with light textured surface. 3.04 PROTECTION: A. PROTECT OTHER WORK from spillage of waterproofing materials. Replace or restore work which is soiled or otherwise damaged by installation of work of this section. END OF SECTION WATERPROOFING 07100-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I I I I I I I SECTION 07175 WATER REPELLANTS PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of surfaces to receive water repellant (WR) is all exterior brick surfaces. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. INSTALLER: A firm with not less than 2 years of successful experience in application of water repellants. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufactmer's specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. Do not proceed with application, if the substrate material contains frozen water. 2. Do not apply water repellent in rainy conditions. 3. Do not apply materials in high or gusty winds. B. PROTECTION: 1. Protect shrubs, metal, glass and other building surfaces during application. 2. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties. 1.06 SCHEDULING: A. NOTIFY ARCHITECT not less than 24 hours before water repellant application is scheduled. 1.07 WARRANTY: A. FURNISH manufacturer's 5 year warranty. 2.01 WATERREPELLANT: A. PRIME-A-PELL 200 as manufactured by Chemprobe Corporation, 2637 National Circle, Garland, Texas 75041.Telephone: (214) 271-5551. B. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE/DISTRIBUTOR: Alan George, Conspec Materials, Inc. Telephone (813) 885-4324. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. CLEAN SUBSTRATE of substances which might interfere with penetration/adhesion of water repellants. Test for moisture content, in accordance with repellant manufacturer's instructions, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. B. COORDINATION WITH SEALANTS: Delay application of water repellants until installation of sealants has been completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent. C. PROTECT ADJOINING WORK, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is possibility of water repellant being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials with drop cloths. Clean water repellant from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. APPL Y A HEAVY saturation spray coating of water repellant on surfaces indicated for treatment using low pressure, airless type spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.03 WATER TEST A. PROVIDE WATER TEST made by manufacturer's representative. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I- I I I ;1 I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07193 ELASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of elastic sheet vapor barrier work (ElsS- VB) is shown on Drawings. B. APPLICATIONS of elastic sheet vapor barriers include the following: 1. On grade under concrete floor slabs. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. COORDINATION: Proceedwith vapor barrier work only after substrate construction has been completed and vents, piping, drains and other projections have been installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: . A. POL YETHYLENE V APOR BARRIER: A single polyethylene film, of natural color and 6.0 mils thick, in widest practical width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALL VAPOR BARRIERS under interior ground-supported floor slabs. Lap joints a minimum distance of 6" and extend up intersecting walls the slab thickness. Seal watertight around items penetrating membrane. Exercise care to avoid punctures. Extend coverage to extremities of areas to receive barrier. ELASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS 07193-1 3.02 PROTECTION OF VAPOR BARRIERS: I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I PROTECT installed vapor barriers, so that continuing construction activities and work of other trades will not result in punctures or other forms of damage and deterioration of vapor barriers. END OF SECTION ELASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS 07193-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of insulation work is shown on drawings, by generic name or by abbreviation. B. APPLICATIONS of insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Board-Type insulation, concealed in exterior walls. 2. Board-Type insulation on roof deck. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity (k- value at 750F. or 240C.) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as directed for equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Where insulation is identified by .oR" value, provide appropriate thickness. B. FIRE AND INSURANCE RATINGS: Comply with fIfe-resistance, flammability and insurance ratings indicated, and comply with governing regulations as interpreted by authorities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: 1. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. GENERAL PROTECTION: Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. INSULATION 07200-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with glass-fiber-reinforced polyisocyanurate closed-cell foam core and aluminum foil facirtg laminated to both sides; complying with FS HH-I-I972/1, Class 2; aged r-values of7.2 and 8 at 40 and 75 deg. F. respectively, and as follows: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum values for flame spread and smoke developed of 20 and 150, respectively. B. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 1. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown, or if not shown, as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. C. TAPER ROOF INSULATION: 1. Provide "Tapered Fesco" as produced by Const. Products Inc. of Bradenton, Florida (where tapered insulation is required) or equal products as approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLERMUST EXAMINE substrate and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. 2. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. 3. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 4. Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying mastic or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with mastic or sealant. S. Set vapor barrier faced units with vapor barrier to warm side of construction, except as otherwise shown. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. INSULA nON 07200-2 I I I I I I I I" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor barriers, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure vapor-tight installation. END OF SECTION INSULATION 07200~3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07410 PREFORMED METAL ROOFING PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: __7 A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ...................... ;.;r,,"J A. THE EXTENT of preformed metal roofmg is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section. Preformed roofmg is hereby defined to include panels which are structurally capable of spanning between supports spaced as indicated and accessories including edge moldings at roof edges, all with fmish to match roof panels. Metal gage for accessories shall be same as metal gage in roof panels. B. THE TYPES of panels required include the following: 1. Formed sheet panels with profile as indicated on Drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: _......,~-~ " A. PERFORMANCE TEST STANDARDS: Provide preformed panel systems which have been pretested and certified by manufacturer under similar installed conditions as indicated for resistance (to withstand at least the local building code requirements) for air and water infiltration and structural deflection and failure; NAAMM Standard Test TM-I; static and dynamic methods. .__...~~u't!: .",.. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: _.,....~. ..;:r:" A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, installation instructions and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total system of preformed panels. B. SAMPLES: Submit 3 samples 12" square, of each exposed finish material. .~--- ...' C. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit small-scale layouts of panels and large-scale details of edge conditions, joints, comers, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim. flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. ~-,,'J':: .( .~ .~"""- PREFORMED METAL ROOFING 07410-1 D. GUARANTY: Provide five (5) year guaranty to refinish, repair, or replace products that fail to comply with painted finish performance requirements specified herein under title of Flurocarbon Coating "Durability". The guaranty shall be executed jointly by both the Contractor and Manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS: A. STEEL FOR PAINTING/COATING: Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet, ASTM A 446, Grade A except where higher strength required for performance, 090 zinc coating, surface treated for maximum coating performance. 2.02 METAL FINISHES: A. GENERAL: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as required by coating process and as required for maximum coating performance capability. Protect coating promptly after application and cure, by application of strippable film or removable adhesive cover, and retain until installation has been completed. Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. FLUROCARBON COATING: Full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked-on for 15 minutes at 450oF, in a dry film thickness of 1.0 miles, 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523) over 0.3 mil baked-on epoxy primer. 1. Durability: Provide coating which has been field tested under normal range of weathering conditions for minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack or check in finish, and without chalking in excess of 8 (ASTM D 659), and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units. Provide guaranty that panel fmish will perform within these excesses for period of guaranty specified herein. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. FASTENERS: Manufacturer's standard noncorrosive types, with exterior heads gasketed. B. ACCESSORIES: Except as indicated as work of another specification section, provide components required for a complete roofmg system, including trim, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips and similar items. Match materials/fmishes of preformed panels. C. BITUMINOUS COATING: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. PREFORMED METAL ROOFING 07410-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.04 PANEL FABRICATION; PERFORMANCES: A. GENERAL: Fabricate and fInish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, and as required to fulftll performance requirements, which have been demonstrated by factory testing. Comply with indicated profIles and dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements. 1. Metal Gages: Thicknesses required for structural performances, but not less than manufacturer's recommended minimums for proftles and applications indicated, and not less than 26 gage. 2. Fabricate end panels without joints. B. APPLY BITUMINOUS COATING or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials which are noncompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or fInishes. C. F ABRICA TE PANEL JOINTS with captive gaskets or separator strips, which provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact in a manner which will minimize noise from movements within panel system. D. CONDENSATION:Fabricate panel system to control condensation, including proper inclusion of seals and provisions for breathing, venting, weeping and draining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: Comply with panel fabricator's and material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal/structural movement. 1. Install panels with concealed fasteners. B. INSTALLATION TOLERANCES: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4" in 20' -0" on level/plumb/slope and 10cationlline as indicated, and within 1/8" offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching proftles. C. JOINT SEALERS: Install gaskets, joint fillers and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets and sealants/fillers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer. 1. Refer to other sections of these specifIcations for product and installation requirements applicable to indicated joint sealers. PREFORMED METAL ROOFING 07410-3 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. DAMAGED UNITS: Replace panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of fInish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures. B. CLEANING: Remove protective coverings and strippable fIlms (if any) at time in project construction sequence which will afford greatest protection of work. Clean fInished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction. C. PROTECTION: Installer shall advise Contractor of protection and surveillance procedures, as required to ensure that work of this section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. PREFORMED METAL ROOFING 07410-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of each type of flashing and sheet metal work is indicated on the Drawings and by provisions of this section. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. COORDINATE WORK of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of the work and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL MATERIALS: A. SHEET METAL FLASHING/TRIM (Mt-FI): 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A 525, G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized for paint; 0.239" thick (24 gage) except as otherwise indicated. a. Provide finish as indicated. 2. Aluminum (Alum): ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14, 0.032" thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated. a. Provide finish as indicated. B. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES: 1. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. 2. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC . Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for IS-mil dry f11m thickness per coat. 3. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1 4. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. S. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 6. Elastic Expansion Joint: Where indicated provide flexible, closed cell rubber or plastic looped bellows mm. 3/8 thick,S" to 6" wide and with metal flanges of .032" aluminum, 3" to 4" wideformed to profiles indicated. Provide standard comer and intersection units and splicing materials. Provide mineral fiber insulation in expansion joint below bellows. 2.02 FABRICATED UNITS: A. GENERAL METAL FABRICATION: 1. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate with waterproof and weather- resistance performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. 3. Expansion Provisions: Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 4. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with industry standards. 5. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints _and seams which will be FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. UNDERLA YMENT: Where aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of paper slip sheet and a course of polyethylene underlayment. C. BED FLANGES of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: CLEAN EXPOSED METAL surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. PROTECTION: Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering, at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. PROVIDE roof accessories as required. B. EACH ITEM MOUNTED ON ROOF shall be supported on a curb unit, unless otherwise indicated. C. PIPE PENETRATIONS thru roof shall be through a pipe seal or pipe curb assembly. D. ROOF CURBS for roof top air conditioning units are to be supplied with the units and are not required by this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. SUBMIT manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFABRICATED CURBS AND PIPE SEALS: A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: 1. Products by the Pate Company are specified, comparable products by Thybar Corporation, Custom Curb, Inc., or an approved equal will be acceptable. 2. Provide products manufactured from prime steel (except for pipe seals). a. Structural quality: ASTM A 446. b. Zinc coating: ASTM A 525, G90. B. PREFABRICATED CURB UNITS: 1. Construction: Box section design of 14 ga. galvanized steel construction, continuous mitered and welded comer seams, integral base plate, factory installed treated wood nailers, and insulated with 1-112" thick, rigid fiberglass board insulation. ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700-1 2. Size: Furnish units with inside dimensions as required for each roof opening. Verify sizes required. 3. Height: 12 inches. 4. Style: PC-Ia or lb, PC-2a or 2b, PC-5a or 5b (as required by deck construction) as manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal C. PIPE SEALS: 1. Construction: Spun aluminum base having a minimum 5 inch roof surface flange, stepped neoprene rubber boot to be secured to base and penetrating pipe with adjustable stainless steel clamps. 2. Size: As required for size of penetrating pipe. 3. Style: Pate Pipe Seal as manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal D. PIPE CURB ASSEMBLY UNITS: 1. Construction: 18 gage galvanized steel, unitized construction with integral base plate, insulated with 3 pound density insulation, 2 x 2 treated wood nailer, acrylic clad ABS plastic cover, fastening screws, graduated step neoprene boots with stainless steel band clamps. 2. Style: PCA-I, PCA-2, or PCA-5 (as required by deck construction) as manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and with roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates. B. FLANGE SEALS: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal. END OF SECTION ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07715 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 MATERIALS A. Metal material used in flashing and sheet metal work shall be 0.05011 mm finish alwninum unless specifically designated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Gauges of metal used in flashing and sheet metal work shall be as specifically designated on the Drawings. When the Drawings omit specifying a particular gauge, such shall be of the gauges set forth in the following descriptions of particular metals. C. Alwninum: Sheets or strips of 3003 or 3004 alloy of the producer's standard finish. 0.050" gauge: 1. Alwninum in contact with concrete or masonry shall receive two (2) coats of water-white methacryt lacquer. 2. Isolate alwninum from other materials, including wood, by a protective bitwninous coating not less than 15 mils dry mil thickness; or, by SBS modified bitwninous sheet felts, rubber or other techniques approve by the Project Architect. D. Provide downspout adapters as supplied by ADS for sizes as indicated on Drawings. E. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM - 153 latest edition, or cadmium plated, (or stainless steel used in stainless steel construction). Fastenings shall match particular sheet metal materials to which applied. Nat Is and screws shall have sufficient length to penetrate all metal and fabric materials and into wood support by 3/4" minimum and shall be capable of 40 lb. each minimum Initial withdrawal. 1. Flashing nails shall be a minimum of 11 gauge, barbed, with 5/811 diameter heads, by 2" with tin caps. 2. Galvanized tin caps shall be of 1" or 2" diameter and 28-30 gauge flat sheet metal. 3. Integral capped flashing nail (simplex type) with round head, galvanized, 7/8" minimum. F. Gutters shall be fabricated as detailed, in such a manner that: the outer Up (top edge) Is lower than the interior Up: so the interior bottom of the gutter sloping positively, no less than 1/16" per lineal foot towards its discharge drain (such shall be accomplished by a separate interior lining or bottom in a manner whereby the visible appearance of the gutter appears true and level horizontally: shall be supported GUITERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07715-1 frequently and adequately; shall be separately fabricated from any metal work built into the roofing system (such as a gravel stop); shall be of special detailed configuration to match the Drawings and details (Le. shall not be of standard "Ogee" or molded configuration, but of rectangular design; and shall be fabricated of sufficiently short lengths to avoid problems with expansion and contraction. 1. Gutters shall be formed of 0.050 mill finish aluminum in accordance with SMACNA. Plate 14-A. Gutter brackets shall be formed of 0.125 aluminum. Gutter spacers shall be formed of 0.062 inch by 1 inch aluminum. G. Downspouts shall be fabricated as detailed of rectangular shape and shall not be of "standard off the shelf' configuration with corrugated indentions or ribs, and shall be supported adequately at uniform and frequent vertical spacing. 1. Downspouts, elbows and downspout hangers shall be formed of 0.050 mill finish aluminum. Downspouts shall be 4 inch by 6 inch rectangular and formed in accordance with SMACNA. Plate 32-B. Hangers shall be formed in accordance with SMACNA. Plate 34-G. Fasteners for gutter hangers shall be a non-corrosive, compatible with aluminum, pan head fastener. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 INSPECTION A. The installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the flashing and sheet metal is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of this phase of the work. Do not proceed with this phase until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of the conditions by this Contractor. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Workmanship shall conform to the best trade standards. Materials shall be the same and tike materials. Do soldering slowly with heavy well heated soldering coppers of blount design, properly tinned before use. Tin edges of each item to be soldered with best grade pure metal. 1-112 inch on both sides with rosin as flux. B. Sheet metal counterflashing normally an integral part of fan housings (air conditioning housing and tike items) wi 11 be furnished as part of such work by other Sections of these Specifications. Other counterflashing items shall be as detailed and specified in the Section. Transitions from roof curbs to gravity vents, fans or other work shall be of specified metal, of low profile design with transitions sloped 45 degrees maximum. Extend counter flashing four (4) inches over base flashing. C. Penetration of the roof membrane shall be with techniques other than pitch pocket pans where possible. However, where such must be used form "pitch pocket pans" of GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07715-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I size to clear items protruding through roofing membranes by three (3) inches on all sides, of 0.050 aluminum, with four (4) inch horizontal (approximate) deck flange and with a six (6) inch height. D. Strainer units halt be fabricated from minimum 0.062" diameter non-corrosive, Compatible wire or wire mesh, with 1/2" maximum spacing of wires of are movable beehive design. E. Welding: Comply with requirements for welding as set forth elsewhere in these Specifications. F. Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanitic corrosion where they touch. PART 4 - INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Installation shall comply with "the SMACNA Manual" recommendations for installation. 2. It shall be required that the flashing and sheet metal work be permanently watertight and shall not deteriorate in excess of published limitations of the manufacturer. B. Thermal expansion shall be provided for in all exposed sheet metal work exceeding 10-0" in running length, except where otherwise indicated: 1. On flashing, gravel stops, coping caps and trim, expansion capability shall be on 1 0"-0" maximum spacing, and located 2'-0" from comers and intersections. 2. Gutters shall be provided with expansion capability at intervals no greater than 50'-0". C. Fasteners and expansion provisions shall be concealed wherever possible. D. Fill "pitch pocket pans" as follows. Install and tightly pack oakum around pipes or other penetrating materials. Install one (I") inch of quick setting cementatious grout above the oakum, pour hot bitumen to a level 3/4" to 1-1/2" from the pitch pan. FIll pitch pan to top with asphalt plastic roofing center. END OF SECTION GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07715-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of each type of joint sealer is indicated on the Drawings, sometimes by abbreviations as indicated herein. B. THE REQUIRED APPLICATIONS include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Exterior wall joints. 2. Isolation joints between structure and other elements. 3. Flashing joints. 4. Interior wall joints around frames and between different types of materials. 5. Joints in concrete paving. C. "ELASTOMERIC SEALANT" shall apply to materials and work to seal and make watertight all joints on the exterior of the building and joints on the interior of the building that may be expected to expand and contract or are subject to water or dampness. D. CAULKING COMPOUND shall apply only to materials and work in connection with the filling or closing of interior joints where expansion or contraction are of no consideration and where filling and closing of these interior joints is primarily for appearance. E. GLAZING: Refer to Division 8 sections for sealants and other compounds and gaskets required for installation of glass. 1.03 SUBMIrr ALS: A. MANUFACTURER'S DATA: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of material required. JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. THE INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the joint surfaces and backing, their anchorage to the structure and the conditions under which the joint sealer work is to be performed, notifying the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealers. Do not procee4 with the joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. WEATHER CONDITIONS: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range. 1.05 SEALANT WARRANTY: A. PROVIDE WRITTEN WARRANTY, signed by Manufacturer and Contractor; agreeing to, within warranty period, replace/repair defective materials and workmanship defined to include: instances of significant leakage of water or air: failures in joint adhesion, material cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion-from-joint resistance, migration resistance" strain resistance, or general durability failure to perform as required as clearly specified in manufacturer's published product literature as an inherent characteristic of the sealant material. Warranty includes responsibility for removal and replacement of work (if any) which conceals or obstructs the replacement of sealants. Warranty covers the following types of sealants on this project, for the following periods of time. I. Elastomeric sealants of every type. 2. Warranty period of 2 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. COLORS: For exposed materials, provide standard color which most closely matches adjacent surfaces. For concealed materials, provide the natural color which has the best overall performance characteristics. B. COMPATIBILITY: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its compatibility with each other material it will be exposed to in the joint system. JOINT SEALERS 07900-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS: A. FOR BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS, provide one of the following: 1. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Vulkem 116; Mameco International. b. Sikaflex la; Sika Chemical Corp. c. Sonolastic NPI; Sonneborn. d. Dynatrol I; Pecora. 2. Two-Component Polyurethane Sealant (2 Pu-S): a. Vulkem 227; Mameco International. b. Sonolastic NP2; Sonneborn. c. Dynatrol II; Pecora. d. Dymeric; Tremco Mfg. Co. B. ISOLATION JOINTS BETWEEN STRUCTURE AND OTHER MATERIALS, provide one of the following: 1. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant (1 PU-S): a. Vulkem 116; Mameco International. b. S~kaflex la; Sika Chemical Corp. c. Sonolastic NPI; Sonneborn. d. Dynatrol I; Pecora. 2.03 FLASHING AND COPING JOINTS: A. NON-SKINNING MASTIC SEALANTS, provide one of the following: 1. Polybutene Mastic Sealant. a. Trem Tape; Tremco, Inc. 2. Polyisobutylene Mastic Sealant. a. Curtain Wall Sealant; Tremco, Inc. 2.04 INTERIOR WALL JOINTS (CALKING), provide one of the following: A. ACRYLIC-EMULSION SEALANT: 1. AC-30 Acrylic Latex; Pecora Corp. 2. Conolac; Sonneborn. 3. VIP Ter-Polymer; VIP Products. 4. Acrylicalk; Standard Drywall Products. 2.05 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS. PAVEMENT EXPANSION JOINTS, provide one of the following: A. TWO-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE SEALANT. 1. Vulkem 245; Mameco International. 2. Sikaflex 12 SL; Sika Chemical Corp. 3. Urexpan NR 200; Pecoa Corp. JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. JOINT CLEANER: Provide type of joint cleaning compound recommended by sealant or calking compound manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be cleaned. B. JOINT PRIMER/SEALER: Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. C. BOND BREAKER TAPE: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant ~contact surface where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self~ adhesive tape wherever applicable. D. SEALANT BACKER ROD: Compressible rod stock of extruded, closed cell polyethylene foam polyethylene jacketed polyurethane fo~ or other material as recommended by compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod which will control joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. Provide one of the following, or an approved equal. 1. Green Rod; Nomaco, Inc. 2. Dow Ethefoam; Dow Chemical Co. E. JOINT FILLERS, PAVEMENT TYPES: Provide resilient, self-expanding and non- extruding type premolded cork units complying with ASTM D 1752, Type III; ES HH~F 341, Type II, Class C; or AASHTO MI53, Type III. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: A. COMPL Y with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. 3.02 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION: A. CLEAN JOINT SURF ACES immediately before installation of sealant or calking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant or calking compound. B. PRIME OR SEAL THE JOINT SURF ACES wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALERS 07900-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALL SEALANT BACKER ROD for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by seal ant manufacturer for the application shown. Take precaution not to puncture backer rod during installation. B. INSTALL BOND BREAKER TAPE wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform property. C. INSTALL PAVEMENT TYPE JOINT FILLERS below sealant and backer rod. as recommended by manufacturer of sealant being used. D. APPLY SEALANT MATERIAL PRIOR TO application of paint, sealers or water repellants to adjacent surfaces. E. EMPLOY ONLY PROVEN INSTALLATION TECHNIQUES, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "Wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, tool sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. F. INSTALL SEALANTS TO DEPTHS as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead: 1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, and neither more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8" deep. 2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep. 3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and calking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75% to 125% of joint width. G. SPILLAG: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. 3.04 CURE AND PROTECTION: A. CURE SEALANTS and calking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise the Contractor of procedures required for the cure and protection of joint sealers during the construction period so that they will be JOINT SEALERS 07900-5 without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering at the lime of Project acceptance. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 07900-6 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including general and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of steel doors and frames is shown on the drawings and schedules and as specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. PROVIDE DOORS AND FRAMES complying with the Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI 100) unless custom items are required. B. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY (if any): Provide fIre-rated doors investigated and tested as fire door assemblies, complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fIre door with recognized testing laboratory labels, h"ldicating applicable fire rating of steel doors. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFP A Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. GALVANIZED STEEL SHEETS: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526. with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES 08110-1 B. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel C. INSERTS, BOLTS AND FASTENERS: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. D. SHOP APPLIED PAINT: 1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. FABRICATE EXTERIOR DOORS, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. B. EXPOSED FASTENERS: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. C. AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS provide doors which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, apparent U factor for thermal-rated assemblies is 0.24 BTU/hr (ft2) OF. D. FINISH HARDWARE PREPARATION: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. E. REINFORCE DOORS AND FRAMES to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site. F. LOCATE FINISH HARDWARE as shown on fmal shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute. G. SHOP PAINTS: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, ruS4 oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 2.03 STANDARD STEEL DOORS: STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES 08110-2 I I I I I I I I- I, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A. PROVIDE METAL DOORS of Grade II, Model 3 and as indicated on the Drawings or schedules and complying with S.D.! 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements. Form face of not less than 18 ga. steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated or required. 1. Provide doors with vision panels (if any). 2. Provide doors with sightproof louvers (if any louvers). For fIre rated openings, use only louvers listed by UL or FM and factory applied to doors. 2.04 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: A. PROVIDE METAL FRAMES of the types and styles indicated on the drawings or schedules and complying with S.D.! 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements. Form frames of not less than 16 ga. steel. B. PROVIDE METAL FRAMES for doors, as shown on the drawings. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown. 1. Fabricate frames with welded joints ground smooth to completely conceal joints unless indicated otherwise. C. DOOR SILENCERS Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double- swing frames. D. PLASTER GUARDS Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of fInish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed and notify the ContraCtor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. PLACING FRAMES: Comply with the provisions of S.D.!. 105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install fIre-rated frames (if any) in accordance with NFP A Standard No. 80. B. DOOR INSTALLATION: STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES 08110-3 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified in S.D.I. 100. 2. Finish hardware for steel doors and frames as specified in Division 8 Series sections of the specifications, and shall be installed under the provisions of this section. 3. Place fife-rated doors (if any) with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80 unless more stringent conditions required by local fife regulations. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. FINAL ADJUSTMENTS Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to fmal inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. B. PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES 08110-4 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL: 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT and location of each wood door is shown on the drawings and in schedules. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. PROTECT WOOD DOORS during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PROVIDE DOORS complying with NWMA 1.5.1. A. HOLLOW CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 1. Core: Comply with NWMA I.S.I. 2. Veneer: Sound grade rotary cut birch. 3. Edges: Solid wood, any species. 4. Finish: Specified under Section 09900 -Painting. B. INTERIOR SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS (For paint finish): 1. Core: particleboard or solid wood block. 2. Veneer: Good grade birch or other hardwood, or PS-l medium density overlay. 3. Edges: Closed grain hardwood. 4. Finish: Specified under Section 09900 .Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. CONDITION DOORS to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to WOOD DOORS 08210-1 WOOD DOORS 08210-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I hanging. . B. HARDWARE: Finish hardware for wood doors is specified in the Finish Hardware section of the Specifications, and shall be installed under the provisions of this section. C. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown. D. FITTING DOORS: Fit doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. Provide prehung doors. 1. Bevel doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. E. CLEARANCE: Provide clearances of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/8" at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2" from bottom of door to top of floor covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled. Provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. F. JOB SITE FINISHED DOORS: Finishing of wood doors is specified in the Painting Section of the Specifications. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. OPERATION: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. B. REFINISH OR REPLACE doors damaged during installation. C. PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK: Advise the Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. END OF SECTION I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM DOORS, FRAMES AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of work is shown on the drawings. B. WORK INCLUDES: 1. Aluminum doors. 2. Aluminum framing. 3. Glass and Glazing. C. DRA WINGS: Elevations and details shown indicate spacings of members and profile and similar dimensional requirements of the work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in Architect's sole judgment, such deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performances. Indicate proposed deviations clearly on shop drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. STANDARDS: Comply with applicable provisions of "Metal Curtain Wall Window, Storefront and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual" by AAMA. B. PRIME GLASS STANDARD: Comply with FS-DD-G-451. C. HEAT-TREATED GLASS STANDARD: Comply with FS DD-G-1403. D. SAFETY GLASS STANDARDS: Comply with the following as applicable: 1. Consumer Product Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201. 2. Industry Standards ANSI Z97.1. E. LOAD-BEARING STRENGTH (WIND RESISTANCE) Provide manufacturer's stock system, adapted to application indicated, which has been tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 to withstand at least the local building code requirements. ALUMINUM DOORS. FRAMES AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 08410-1 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing adaptation of manufacturer's standard system to project; include elevations 1/2" scale and details at 3" scale, to show dimensioning, members, anchorage system, interface with building construction and glazing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. ALUMINUM MEMBERS: Provide members of alloy, temper and thicknesses recommended by manufacturer to comply with requirements; ASTM B 221 for extrusions. 2.02 GRID FRAMING: A. PROVIDE GLASS FRAMING MEMBERS designed for flush glazing on all sides with through sight lines, and no projecting stops or face joints, unless otherwise shown. Provide fully resilient settings for glass (and panels if any) by use of elastomeric gaskets on both sides of the glass. B. MANUFACTURER: Unless otherwise shown, provide Trifab "450" framing system by Kawneer Company, Inc. or equivalent system by one ofthe following manufacturers: 1. Amarlite/ Anaconda Aluminum Division. 2. Vistawall. 3. Tubel ite/Consol idated Aluminum. 2.03 GLASS: A. PRIME (NONPROCESSED) GLASS: 1. FloatIPlate Glass (F/POg): Type I, Quality q3 clear unless otherwise indicated. Provide 114, inch thick glass unless otherwise required. B. PROCESSED GLASS: 1. Tempered Glass (Tmp-): Provide prime glass, clear unless otherwise indicated, which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed strength. Provide1l4" thick glass unless otherwise indicated. C. INSULATING GLASS: 1. Install 1" insulating glass in all windows in exterior wall. ALUMINUM DOORS. FRAMES AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 08410-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.04 DOOR UNITS: A. PROVIDE NARROW STILE DOOR UNITS with main portions of door stiles .125 inch thickness and glazing molding .050 inch thick. Provide snap-in type glazing stops with neoprene bulb-type glazing, no exposed screws to secure stops. Provide stops that are tamper proof type on exterior side. B. MANUFACTURER: Provide doors by same manufacturer as manufactur~r of storefront grid framing as follows 1. Amarlitel Anaconda Aluminum Division; Model 72. 2. Vistawall; Narrow Stile. 3. Tubelite/Consolidated Aluminum; Narrow Stile. 4. Kawneer Company, Inc.; Narrow Stile "190". C. WEATHERSTRIPPING: Provide replaceable weather stripping around the perimeter of each door leaf. Provide flexible, non-porous, polymeric strip (conventional pile type weather stripping will not be allowed). D. PROVIDE DOOR MANUFACTURER'S standard heavy-duty hardware units as shown, scheduled or required for operation of each door, including the following items (Kawneer shown except as noted) of the sizes, number and type listed: 1. Offset pivots for single acting doors and center pivots for double acting doors. Cast aluminum alloy with steel pins and oilite bearings (ball-bearings bottom pivots), fInished to match door fInish. Doors over 7' -6" will require intermediate pivots. 2. Overhead-concealed closers, for use with pivots (concealed in frame at head), 2- speed with hold-open. Huskey, Jackson or LCN. 3. Locking Devices: Provide Adams Ri~e maximum security dead locks in conjunction with both single door and double door locking devices. Both single door and double door locking devices shall be controlled on the outside by key in cylinder and on the inside by a turn piece. On double door entrances provide Kawneer Controller Locking System (or equal) with one-stage unlocking by turn piece allowing both doors to swing open. This system shall include three point locking security. Exposed surfaces of locks, cylinders, and turn pieces shall match door fInish. 4. Cylinders: Furnished by the hardware supplier, specifIed in Section 08700, installed under the provisions of this section. 5. Standard aluminum pull units: Style F-2 fInished to match the door fInish. 6. Standard aluminum push bars: Type F-2 fInished to match the door fInish. 7. Thresholds: Complete with anchors mid clips, coordinated with pivots, extruded aluminum, of size shown or, if not shown, of manufacturer's standard size but not less than 4" wide by 112" high, mill fInish. 8. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware, except do not drill and tap for surface-mounted items until the time of installation at the project site. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. 9. Install all hardware, except surface-mounted hardware, at the fabrication plant. ALUMINUM DOORS. FRAMES AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 08410-3 Remove only as required for fInal fInishing operations, and for delivery and installation of the work at the project site. 2.05 ACCESSORIES: A. GLAZING GASKETS: Manufacturer's standard glazing system of resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks and shims or spacers as required; hardness selected by manufacturer. 1. Gasket color: Black unless otherwise indicated. B. BRACKETS AND REINFORCEMENTS: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. C. FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES: Manufacturer's standard with exposed portions matching fInish of frame system. D. JOINT FILLERS: SpecifIed in Section 07900. 2.06 EXPOSED FINISH: A. COLOR ANODIZED FINISH NAAMM AA-M12C22A42 0.7 mils integral dark bronze anodized fInish. A. HIGH PERFORMANCE ORGANIC COATING: Provide NAAMM AA-C12C42Rlx coating (cleaned with inhibited chemicals, conversion coated with acid-chromate- fluoride-phosphate treatment, and painted with organic coating specifIed below). Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' instructions. 1. Fluorocarbon Coating: Provide manufacturer's standard multicoat thermo-cured system, composed of specially formulated primer and fluorocarbon topcoats, complying with AAMA 605.2. 2. Color: Provide color as selected by Architect from standard choices available from the coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE conditions under which work is to be installed or erected, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. ALUMINUM DOORS. FRAMES AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 08410-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS for protection, handling and installation with particular attention and care in preservation of applied finishes. Discard or remove and replace damaged members. C. SET UNITS PLUMB, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames, doors or panels. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. D. SET SILL MEMBERS and other members in a bed of compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction. 3.02 GLASS AND GLAZING: A. WATERTIGHT INSTALLATION of each piece of glass is required. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating doors), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. INSTALL TYPE OF GLASS, at each location, which is in compliance with the Consumer Product Safety Commission. C. PROTECT GLASS FROM EDGE DAMAGE during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazed components of the work. D. COMPLY WITH COMBINED RECOMMENDATIONS of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. E. COMPLY WITH "GLAZING MANUAL" and other applicable publications by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturers of glass and glazing materials. F. INSPECT EACH PIECE of glass immediately before installation, and discard pieces which have significant edge damage or face imperfections. G. INSTALL SETTING BLOCKS of proper size in sill rabbet, located l/4th of glass width from each comer. H. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CUT, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered or heat strengthened. ALUMINUM DOORS. FRAMES AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 08410-5 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. CLEAN COMPLETED SYSTEM, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass and sealants. Installer shall advise Contractor of proper and adequate protection and cleaning procedures during remainder of construction period, so that system will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. B. AT TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, clean system thoroughly and polish glass. C. REMOVE AND REPLACE GLASS which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM DOORS. FRAMES AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 08410-6 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of aluminum windows is shown on Drawings and specified. B. RELATED WORK: 1. Storefront System: Section 08410. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. STANDARDS: Requirements for aluminum windows, terminology and standards of performance, and fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in AAMA 101-85 and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and M.B. LOAD-BEARING STRENGTH (WIND RESISTANCE): Provide system adapted to application indicated, which has been tested in accordance with ASTM-E330 to withstand at least the local building code requirement. C. PRIME GLASS STANDARD: Comply with FS DD-G-451. D. HEAT-TREATED GLASS STANDARD: Comply with FS DD-G-1403. E. SAFETY GLASS STANDARDS: Comply with the following as applicable. 1. Consumer Product Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201. 2. Industry Standards ANSI Z97.1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and standard details for aluminum window units, including certified test laboratory reports as necessary to show compliance with requirements. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-1 B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings, including wall elevations at 1/4" scale, typical unit elevations at 3/4" scale, and full size detail sections of every typical composite member. Show anchors, hardware, operators, and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. MANUFACTURER: Provide aluminum window units by one of the following or equal as approved. Horizontal Sliding and Fixed Windows Alenco Div.; Redman Fisher-Insley Corp. Graham Architectural Products Corp. Capitol Windows EFCO Corporation Milco Div., Wausau Three Rivers Aluminum Co., Inc. Ultralum Div., Alside Winco Manufacturing Company B. ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS: Alloy and temper recommended by window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062" thickness at any location for main frame and sash members. Comply with ASTM B 221. C. FASTENERS: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125" thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or non-standard non-corrosive pressed-in splined grommet units. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. 3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners. D. ANCHORS, CLIPS AND WINDOW ACCESSORIES: Depending on strength and corrosion-inhibiting requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASIM A 386. E. COMPRESSION GLAZING STRIPS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING: At manufacturer's option, provide molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded expanded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I F. SLIDING WEATHERSTRIPPING: Provide woven pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric, and aluminum backing strips. Comply with AAMA 701. G. GLASS FIBER MESH (Insect): 18 x 16 or 18 x 14 mesh of plastic-glass fiber threads, woven and fused to form fabric mesh is resistance to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact and weather deterioration. Comply with FS-L-S-125. H. FRICTION SHOES: Nylon or other non-abrasive, non-metallic, non-staining, non- corrosive durable material. 1. SEALANT AND JOINT FILLERS: Specified in Section 07900. 2.02 WINDOW CLASSIFICATION (GRADEIPERFORMANCE): A. REA VY COMMERCIAL WINDOWS: Provide window units complying with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class HC40. 2.03 WINDOW TYPES (OPERATION): A. GENERAL: Following paragraphs define operating arrangements for types for sash (ventilators) required in window units and specify minimum provisions for each type. Drawings show which panels of each window unit are operable sash and which are fixed. B. FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS: No operating hardware or equipment is required. C. HORIZONTAL SLIDING ALUMINUM WINDOWS (HS-A W): Units containing one or more horizontally sliding sash; requiring track for horizontal movement, with rollers in sash or with friction shoes if size of sash does not require use of rollers to provide ease of operation, with combination pull and latch unit which prevent removal of sash when latched. 1. Provide sash which can be removed from inside without use of tools. 2.04 GLASS: A. PRIME (NONPROCESSED) GLASS: 1. FloatIPlate Glass (FIPOg): Type I, Quality 3q, clear unless otherwise indicated. Provide y.. inch thick glass unless otherwise required. B. PROCESSED GLASS: 1. Tempered Glass (Tmp-): Provide prime glass, clear unless otherwise indicated, which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed strength. Provide y.. inch thick glass unless otherwise required. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-3 2.05 F ABRICA TION AND ACCESSORIES: A. GENERAL: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with indicated standards and are reglazable without dismantling of sash framing, except to extent more specific or more stringent requirements are indicated. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. B. SIZES AND PROFILES: Required sizes of window units and profile requirements are shown on drawings. Variable dimensions (if any) are indicated along with maximum and minimum dimensions as required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. 1. Details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. It is intended that similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/maximum profile requirements, and performance standard as shown or specified. C. PROVIDE WATERSHED MEMBERS at top of windows. D. PROVIDE MEANS OF DRAINAGE for water and condensation which may accumulate in members of window units. E. PROVIDE MULLIONS AND COVER PLATES as shown, matching window units, and complete with anchors for support and installation. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movements of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. F. PROVIDE INSECT SCREEN UNIT for each operable exterior sash, except as otherwise indicated. Locate screen units on either inside or outside of sash, depending upon window type. Where possible, design window units and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches, and without necessity of wickets for hardware access. Where wickets are necessary, provide either sliding or hinged type, framed and trimmed for durability during handling, and for tight fit. 1. Fabricate screen frames of either extruded or formed aluminum tubular-shaped members of 0.040" minimum wall thickness, with mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners, with removable PVC spline-anchor concealing edge of screen fabric. Finish frames to match window units, unless otherwise indicated. a. At manufacturer's option screen frames may be fabricated of non-magnetic stainless steel members of 0.020" minimum wall thickness. Finish with manufacturer's standard No. 2B bright mill finish. G. PROVIDE GROUP SYSTEM of type and in groups shown. Coordinate design of operator with window fabrication and hardware selection, to ensure smooth, durable operation of sashes. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.06 ALUMINUM WINDOW FINISHES: A. COLORED ANODIZED FINISH: NAAMM AA-C22A32, Class n (minimum thickness of 0.4 mils), integral or electrolytically deposited color anodized dark bronze finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. COMPL Y with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of work. B. SET SILL MEMBERS and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 sealant sections for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed with window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of work. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. ADJUST OPERATING SASH AND HARDWARE to provide tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping, for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. CLEA.1\l ALUMINUM SURF ACES promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. CLEAN GLASS of units promptly after installation of windows. D. INITIATE NA D MAINTAIN ALL PROTECTION and other precautions required to ensure that windows will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of builders hardware is shown on the drawings and in schedules and is intended to include hardware for all swinging doors, unless such hardware is included under other sections of the specifications. B. FURNISH AND DELIVER to the job site for fitting and installation under other sections of the specifications. C. IT IS INTENDED that the list of hardware will cover all finish hardware to complete the Project. Omission and/or discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect's attention during the bidding period. Any additional hardware shall be of the same design and quality as hardware specified for similar openings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. HARDWARE SUPPLIER: Hardware shall be furnished by builder's hardware supplier having appropriate technical knowledge and experience to correctly interpret Drawings and Specifications. He shall be prepared at all times during progress of installation to promptly provide a competent and efficient Architectural Hardware Consultant (ARC or equivalent) to intelligently service the hardware at the project and to approve its installation to the end that all items shall be installed in the best manner and function properly. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Based on the builders hardware requirements indicated, organize the hardware schedule into "hardware sets", indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. Identify each item in the. Schedule on the first page of the Schedule by the manufacturer's name. 1. Submit typewritten schedule for approval in accordance with Section 01340, at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work (such as hollow metal frames) which may be crucial in the project construction schedule. FINISH HARDWARE 08700-1 2. After approval, provide required number of approved schedules for distribution. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. PACKAGING OF H4RDW ARE. on a set by set basis, is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by the hardware supplier from the various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers marked with the hardware set number. Two or more identical sets may be packaged in the same container. B. INVENTORY HARDWARE jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct. C. PROVIDE secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project. Store items off the ground, protected from theft or damage. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. COORDINATION: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the fmal hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. B. TEMPLATES This supplier shall furnish Hardware Schedule as approved by the Architect and all necessary hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation of hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISHES: (Unless otherwise indicated provide following finishes) A. BUTTS - Exterior: B. BUTTS - Interior: C. LOCKS: D. PUSH, PULL & KICK PLATES: E. CLOSERS: F. PANIC DEVICES: G. DOOR STOPS & MISCELLANEOUS: USP USP US 26D US 28 SBL US 26D US 26D FINISH HARDWARE 08700-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.02 BUTTS: A. DOORS 1-3/4" thick: Minimum 4 112" high. B. BUTTS used with door closers shall be ball bearing. Exterior doors shall have ball bearing butts, except as otherwise specified. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Stanley, Mckinney, Hager and Lawrence. 2.03 LOCKSETS: A. ONE of the following manufacturers or approved equal; furnished in the function specified in the hardware set: MANUFACTURER CYLINDRICAL Series Design MORTISE Series Design Russwin Corbin Sargent Yale 3300 5000 6 5300 Austin 633 OB COP 5000 9500 18-7700 8000 Ashford 833 KDD COP-2 B. KNOBS, escutcheons, locksets and cylinders shall be the products of one manufacturer. C. MINIMUM WALL thickness of knobs and roses: .101" and .099" respectively. D. LATCH BOLTS shall have 3/4" throw. Deadbolts shall have hardened steel inserts and l" throw. 2.04 CLOSERS: ONE OF THE FOLLOWING manufacturers or approved equal; furnished in the manufacturers recommended printed size for specified condition unless otherwise noted in the hardware sets. Closers shall be full rack and pinion complete with back check. Springs shall be motor clock type. Furnish flush mount transom brackets where no transom bar exists. Furnish parallel ann where required. MANUFACTURER SERIES Russwin Corbin LCN Norton 2800 100 4030 8200 FINISH HARDWARE 08700-3 2.05 DOOR TRIM: A. PUSH PLATES, pulls, pull plates, kick and/or armor plates: One of the following manufacturer's products or approved equal in catalogue number as set forth herein: MANUFACTURER PUSH PLATE PULL PLATE KlCKPLATE Brookline Baldwin Cipco 69 100/8 x16 550u 906 100 x 94 3/4 x 16 500K x 34SP 8" x 2 LDW 2.06 SILENCERS: A. FOR METAL DOOR FRAMES, provide door silencers type 33 or 34, three per single door; two per pair of doors. 2.07 DOOR HOLDERS: A. ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS or approved equal furnished in the manufacturers' recommended size for specified conditions unless otherwise noted in the hardware sets. All holders shall be automatic with adjustable holding force. Furnish flush mount transom brackets where no transom bar exists. MANUFACTURER TYPE GJ370. F44M X pipe, F40M-X, W40M X, GJ80M 1650, P239 x pipe, 232 1/2, 230 1/2 x 522 865, P2819 x pipe. 2810-12, 2812-12, 812 Glynn-Johnson Russwin Corbin 2.08 DOOR STOPS: ONE of the following manufacturers or approved equal: MANUFACTURER Glynn-Johnson Russwin Ives Where pairs of doors interfere with one another RB-3 or RB-4 Other areas unless otherwise specified WB05X 335 1/2 407 2.09 KEYING: A. KEY QUANTITY: Furnish 2 keys for each lock and 2 keys for each master system. Each store shall have separate master system. FINISH HARDWARE 08700-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.10 FASTENINGS: A. PROVIDE screws of matching finish to their product and of manufacturers' standard for that item. B. ATIACH DOOR CLOSERS, door holders and exit devices installed on wood doors by means of bolts and sex nuts. 2.11 180 DEGREE OPENINGS: A. OTHER THAN THOSE DOORS that are restricted to less than 180 degree openings by building, all butts and/or closer arms shall be of sufficient size to allow full 180 degree opening of doors. 2.12 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. REFER TO THE DRAWINGS for Hardware Schedules. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY items called for under this Section shall be installed under other sections of the specifications. B. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND INSPECTIONS The builders hardware supplier shall be required to instruct the Contractor in the proper installation of all hardware items furnished under this Section and inspect the installation of such material for proper installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A final inspection shall be made at such time as all hardware items have been installed prior to acceptance by the Owner, and a written report of any malfunction or poor installation be submitted to the Architect: C. MOUNT HARDWARE UNITS AT HEIGHTS LISTED BELOW: 1. Distance from finish floor to center line of: Door Knob 38" Door Pull 42" Deadlock 60" Exit Bolt Cross Bar 38" Push Plate 50" Butt Hinges Bottom hinge - finish floor to bottom of Hinge 10". Top hinge - head rabbet to top of hinge 5". Center hinge equi-distance between top and bottom hinge. FINISH HARDWARE 08700-5 FINISH HARDWARE 08700-6 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Push Plates: 48" above fInish floor to center. Furnish cutout where required. 3. Optional Mounting Heights: For standard steel doors and frames, hardware may be installed at heights standard with the Steel Door Institute (SDI). D. INSTALLATION AIDS It shall be theresponsibility of the builder's hardware supplier to loan upon request, to the Contractor, for this Project only, one complete lockset installation kit, supplied by the lockset manufacturer, which includes boring jigs with bits adapted for hand or power tools, lockset face plate, and strike mortise chisels. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08711 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE Item # 1 Doors 1,2, and 3 to have butts by door manufacturer; add the following: 1 Panic Device: Von Duprin "Chexit" Controlled exit device Item #2 2 Pro 1 1 1 Doors 4,5,8,& 9: Each to Have: Butts FBB191 Lockset Best 30H Series Closer P2820B Threshold 170A NRP Item #3 Doors 6 & 10: Each to Have: 2 Pro Butts (ea. Leaf) 1 Lockset 1 Kick Plate 1 Threshold 170A 2 Surface Bolts SB453TB 1 Wall Mount Holder FBB 191 Best 30H Series 8 x 2LDW WS40 Item #4 Door 11: to have: 2 Pro Butts 1 Privacy Set FBB 191 F76; L Function Item #5 Door 13: to have: 2 Pro Butts 1 Closet Set FBB191 F75; N Function I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRA WlNGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of glass and glazing work is shown on the Drawings, and by provisions of this section. B. THE TYPES of work or locations requiring glass and glazing include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Window units not indicated as factory preglazed. 2. Window wall construction. 3. Exterior entrances not indicated to be preglazed. C. RELATED WORK: 1. Sealants: Section 07900. 2. Mirrors: Division 10. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. PRIME GLASS STANDARD: Comply with ES DD-G-451. B. HEAT-TREATED GLASS STANDARD: Comply with ES DD-G-1403. C. SAFETY GLASS STANDARDS: Comply with the following as applicable: 1. Consumer Product Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201. 2. Industry Standards ANSI Z97.1 D. MANUFACTURERS: Provide each type of glass and primary sealant! gasket from a single manufacturer with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the production of materials similar to those required. E. INSTALLER (GLAZIER): Firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in glazing work similar to required work. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-1 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS for shipping, handling, storing and protecting glass and glazing materials. Exercise exceptional care to prevent edge damage to glass. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. INSPECTION: Glazier must examine framing and substrate work to receive glass and glazing materials, and conditions under which glass is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Glazier. B. WEATHER: Do not proceed with glazing under adverse weather conditions. Install liquid sealants when temperatures are within lower or middle third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. SUBJECT to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or equal as approved: 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. LOF Glass, Inc. 2.02 GLASS: A. TYPE A: TYPE I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), 1/4" thick. B. TYPE B: TINTED FLOAT GLASS: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). C. TYPE C: UNCOATED TINTED HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type 1 (transparent flat, glass), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with tint color and performance characteristics for 1/4" thick glass matching those indicated for non-heat-treated tinted float glass, FT (fully tempered) 1/4" thick. D. TYPE D: TYPE n. (wired glass, flat), Class 1 (translucent), Quality 8q (glazing); complying with ANSI-Z97.1; 1/4" thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below. Polished Wire Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides, Mesh m2 (square). GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.03 GLAZING SEALANTS: A. ONE PART NON-ACID CURING MEDIUM MODULUS SILICONE GLAZING SEALANT: 1. Dow Corning 795; Dow Corning Corporation. 2. Silpruf; General Electric Corporation. 3. Spectrum 2; Tremco, Inc. 2.04 GLAZING GASKETS: A. MOLDED NEOPRENE GLAZING GASKETS: Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets of the profile and hardness required for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D 2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS: A. SETTING BLOCKS: Neoprene, 70-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. B. SPACERS: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. C. CLEANERS, PRIMERS AND SEALERS: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE: A. WATERTIGHT AND AIRTIGHT INSTALLATION of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. PROTECT GLASS FROM EDGE DAMAGE during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazed components of the work. C. GLAZING CHANNEL DIMENSIONS are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions. D. COMPLY WITH COMBINED RECOMMENDATIONS of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-3 stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. E. COMPL Y WITH "GLAZING MANUAL" and other applicable publications by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturers of glass and glazing materials. F. INSPECT EACH PIECE of glass immediately before installation and discard pieces which have significant edge damage or face imperfections. G. UNIFY APPEARANCE OF EACH SERIES of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. H. CUT AND INSTALL COLORED (tinted), heat-absorbing and coated glass as recommended in "Technical Services Report No. 104" (latest edition) by PPG Industries, or similar reports by other manufacturers. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING: A. CLEAN THE GLAZING CHANNEL, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used. B. APPLY PRIMER OR SEALER to joint surfaces wherever recommended by seal ant manufacturer. 3.03 GLAZING: A. INSTALL SETTING BLOCKS of proper size in sill rabbet, located 1I4th of glass width from each comer. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any. B. PROVIDE SPACERS inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 118 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. C. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CUT, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered or heat strengthened, including glass which is heat-treated as a result of a coating process. D. TOOL EXPOSED SURF ACES of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of chromel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. E. CLEAN AND TRIM excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-4 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I F. GASKET GLAZING: Miter cut and bond ends together at comers where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from comers and result in voids or leaks in glazing system. 3.04 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. PROTECT EXTERIOR GLASS FROM BREAKAGE immediately upon installation, by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. B. REMOVE AND REPLACE GLASS which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. C. MAINTAIN GLASS in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash-oft) to deterioration of glazing materials and other work. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. D. WASH AND POLISH GLASS on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning. END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09200 LATH AND PLASTER PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. TYPES OF WORK INCLUDE: 1. Metal support, furring and lathing. 2. Portland cement plastering. B. RELATED WORK: 1. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 06113. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING STANDARDS: ANSI A 42.2 AND A42.3 B. LATHING, FURRING AND SUSPENSION STANDARD: ASTM-C 841. C. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: For flat surfaces, do not exceed 1/4" in 8' -0" for bow or warp of surface, and for plumb or level. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation iristructions for each material, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. DELIVER, STORE AND PROTECT manufactured materials to comply with referenced standards. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. PROTECT CONTIGUOUS WORK from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects which might result from plastering. LATH AND PLASTER 09200-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL SUPPORT, FURRING, LATHING AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS: A. GENERAL: 1. Metals and Finishes: a. Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized fInish on all materials except as otherwise indicated. b. Exposed Plastering Accessories: Provide zinc alloy accessories for exterior work unless otherwise indicated. c. Heavy Gage Members (Rolled Channels, etc.): Provide with rust-inhibitive paint fInish in non-exposed interior areas and galvanized fInish in non- exposed areas. 2. Wire Ties: Galvanized soft steel wire. B. METAL LATHING MATERIALS: 1. General: Where not otherwise indicated, comply with MLF A "Technical Bulletin 101" and ASTM C 841 for selection of metal lath for each application indicated. a. Product Standards: Comply with FS QQ-L-I01. 2. Self-Furring Diamond Mesh Lath: 3.4 Ibs. per sq. yd., std., mesh sheet with 1/4" deformations. 3. Diamond Mesh Lath: 3.4 Ibs. per sq. yd. C. CEILING/SOFFIT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: 1. Size following components to comply with reference standards unless otherwise indicated. a. Main Runners: Hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel. b. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 galvanized. 2. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, inserts, or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices or by certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated hanger loading except size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated hanger loading. a. Channel Cross Furring: Hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel channels. D. METAL PLASTERING ACCESSORIES AND REINFORCEMENT: 1. General: Coordinate depth of accessory with thickness of and number of coats of plaster to be applied. 2. Square-Edged Casing Beads: Manufacturer's standard with expanded or short flange to suit application, zinc alloy. 3. Control Joints: No. 15 sized to full plaster thickness, expanded flanges, zinc alloy. 4. F~teners: Galvanized steel, of type and length suitable for adequate penetration of the substrate. LATH AND PLASTER 09200-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS: A. GENERAL: Provide either neat or ready-mixed (where applicable) materials, at Installer's option, complying with ANSI A42.2. B. BASE-COAT CEMENT: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type lor IA. C. BASE-COATLIME: Special finished hydrated lime, Type S. D. BASE-COAT AGGREGATE: Sand. E. PREPARED FINISH COAT: Factory-prepared fInish for portland cement plaster, type recommended by the manufacturer for texture indicated. 1. Texture: Sand-float fInish for painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations where other more stringent requirements are not indicated. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES: A. ANCHOR EACH FLANGE of accessories 8" O.c. to plaster base. B. MITER OR COPE accessory comers and install with tight joints accurately aligned. C. SET ACCESSORIES plumb, level and true to line, with a tolerance of 118" in 10'-0". D. INSTALL CASING BEADS at terminations of plaster work, except where plaster is indicated to pass through other work, and be concealed by lapping work, and except where special screeds, bases or frames act as casing beads. E. INSTALL PREFABRICATED CONTROL JOINTS of one-piece design where shown as "Control Joint" or as required to control plaster cracks. Back control joints with 2" wide butyl tape applied to the sheathing. Install joints with flanges under self-furring lath and attach with Bostitch 9/16" "G" staples or equal, spaced 6" apart on each flange. Break supporting members, sheathing and metal lath behind control joints. Apply sealant at all splices, intersections and terminals. 303 APPLICATION OF METAL LATH: A. EXTERIOR LATH OVER GYPSUM SHEATHING: Apply self-furring metal lath over gypsum sheathing and No. 15 asphalt felt with long dimension across steel studs, with LATH AND PLASTER 09200-3 ends lapped I" and staggered in adjacent courses, with.sides lapped 1/2". Screw-attach lath through gypsum sheathing to steel studs and runners with 1 1/4" Type S-12 Pancake Head CadmiUD;l-plated Screws 8" O.c. B. EXTERIOR LATH OVER FURRING CHANNELS: Apply diamond mesh lath, as specified, over furring channels where indicated. Apply with long dimension across supports, with ends lapped 1" and staggered in adjacent courses, with sides lapped 1/2". Where laps occur between supports, they shall be laced or tied with 18 gage tie wire. Secure lath to all supports at intervals not exceeding 6". 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PLASTER: A. MECHANIC ALL Y MIX PLASTER materials at the project site. Do not hand mix except where small amounts are needed, using less than one bag of plaster. B. SEQUENCE PLASTER installation properly with the installation and protection of other work, so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the work. C. PLASTER FLUSH WITH built-in or accessories which act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise shown. D. THICKNESSES and number of coats of plaster: 1. Provide 2-coat plaster installation over masonry. 2. Provide 3-coat plaster installation over metal lath on furring. 3. Provide 3/4" thickness over metal lath. 4. Provide 1/2" thickness over masonry. E. TEXTURE OF PLASTER FINISHES: Except as otherwise indicated, apply finish-coat as follows: 1. Sand-float finish. F. CURE PORTLAND CEMENT plaster by maintaining each coat in a moist condition for 2 days following application; keep enclosed and fog-spray (after initial set) as required to prevent dry-out. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. CUT, PATCH, POINT-UP AND REPAIR PLASTER as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry-outs, efflorescence, and similar defects, including areas of the work which do not comply with specified tolerances, and where bond to the substrate has failed. LATH AND PLASTER 09200-4 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION and enclosures of other work. Promptly remove plaster from surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair walls and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers and equipment. B. lNST ALLER shall advise the Contractor of requirements for the protection of plaster from deterioration and damage during the remainder of the construction work. END OF SECTION LATH AND PLASTER 09200-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. TYPES of work include: 1. Gypsum drywall including screw-type support system. 2. Gypsum drywall applied to wood furring. 3. Drywall finishing Ooint tape-and-compound treatment). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD: Comply with ASTM C 840 for application and finishing of gypsum board. B. METAL SUPPORT STANDARD: ASTM C 754. C. MANUFACTURER: Obtain gypsum boardproducts from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards. D. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/4" in 8' -0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. CERTIFICATION: Contractor shall submit Certification that all metal studs installed in project, as work of this section, comply with ASTM C 645 Standard and gage indicated. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. DELIVER, IDENTIFY, STORE AND PROTECT gypsum drywall materials to comply with referenced standards. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-1 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Comply with referenced standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS: A. PARTITION SUPPORT MATERIALS: 1. Studs: ASTM C 645; 25 gage unless otherwise indicated. U.S. gypsum products or equaL a. Depth of Section: 3-5/8", except as otherwise indicated. b. Runners: Match studs; tYPe recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work. c. Stud System Accessories: Provide stud manufacturer's standard clips, shoes, ties, reinforcements, fasteners and other accessories as needed for a complete stud system. 2. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 25 gage, hat-shaped. B. CEILING/SOFFIT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: 1. General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C 754, unless otherwise indicated. U.S. Gypsum products or equal 2. Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold-rolled. 3. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 4. Angle-Type Hangers: Not less than 7/8" x 7/8" x 16-gage galvanized steel formed angles, with bolted connections and 5/16" diameter bolts. (Provide where required by Code or by heavy loading or by exceptional uplift resistance). 5. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, cast-in-place concrete inserts or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices or by certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated load supported except size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated loads. 6. Furring Members: ASTM C 645,0.0179" mm. thickness of base metal, hat-shaped. 7. Furring Members: ASTM C645, 0.179" mm. thickness of base metal, C-shaped studs. (Provide for spans of more than 4"). 8. Furring Anchorages: 16-gage galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire- type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with C 754. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS: A. EXPOSED GYPSUM BOARD (GypBd): (Also known as gypsum wallboard). Regular type with tapered long edges. 1. Edge Profile: Special rounded or beveled edge. 2. Thickness: li2" except where otherwise indicated. 3. Sheet Size: Maximum length available which will minimize end joints. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4. Type X: Provide where required (fire-resistive). 5. W ater~Resistant Type (WR-): Provide in wet areas. U.S. Gypsum products or equal 2.03 TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. GENERAL: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide comer beads, L-type edge trim- beads, and one-piece control joint beads. 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: GENERAL: ASTM C 475; type recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, except as otherwise indicated. B. JOINT TAPE: Perforated type. C. JOINT COMPOUND: Ready-mixed vinyl-type for interior use. 1. Grade: 2 separate grades; one specifically for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding. 2. Provide water resistant type for treatment of water resistant boards: Sheetrock Brand W /R Compound by U.S. Gypsum Co. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. GENERAL: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of type and grade recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. B. GYPSUM BOARD FASTENERS: Comply with ASTM-C 840. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS: 1. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board alone. 2. Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud systems abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as indicated to the structural support or substrate above the ceiling. (Where partitions are supported from overhead construction, support them from structural elements and not from metal decks, if any). 4. Space studs 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. 5. Frame door openings with vertical studs securely attach~ by screws at each jamb GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-3 either directly to fi'ames or to jamb anchor clips on door frame; install runner track sections (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Provide runner tracks of same gage as jamb studs. Space jack studs same as partition studs. b. Install 20 gage studs at each jamb for all doors 2'-8" wide to 4'-0" wide weighing not more than 200 lbs., and for all doors less than 2'-8" wide weighing more than 1 00 lbs., but not more than 200 lbs. 6. Frame openings other than door openings in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 7. Install supplementary framing, runners, furring blocking and bracing at openings and terminations in the work, and at locations required to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishing and similar work which cannot be adequately supported directly on gypsum board alone. 3.02 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. PRE-INSTALLATIONCONFERENCE: Meet at project site with installers of related work and review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum drywall has been accomplished, and that supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been completed. B. INSTALL WALL/PARTITION BOARDS vertically to avoid end-butt joints wherever possible. At high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. C. DO NOT INSTALL IMPERFECT, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open space between boards. Do not force into place. D. LOCATE EITHER EDGE OR END JOINT over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that both tapered edge joints abut, and mill-cut or field-cut end joints abut. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. E. ATTACH GYPSUM BOARD TO FRAMING AND BLOCKING as required for additional support at openings and cutouts. F. SPACE FASTENERS in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. 3.03 METHODS OF GYPSUM DRYWALL APPLICATION: A. SINGLE-LA YER FASTENING METHODS: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 1. Fasten to metal studs with screws. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Fasten to wood supports with nails or screws. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. GENERAL: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. INSTALL METAL CORNER BEADS at external corners of drywall work. C. INSTALL METAL EDGE TRIM whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL FINISHING: A. GENERAL: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fasteners, heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. 1. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessory is indicated. 2. Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between last two coats and after last coat. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK: A. INSTALLER SHALL ADVISE CONTRACTOR of required procedures for protecting gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09301 TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION OF WORK: Tile includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic materials. The types of work of this section include: 1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile. 2. Glazed Wall Tile. 3. Marble. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. TILE MANUFACTURING STANDARD: TCA 137.1. Furnish tile complying with Standard Grade requirements unless indicated otherwise. B. PROPRIETARY MATERIALS: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. PROVIDE MATERIALS obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials. 1.04 SUBMITIALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for materials required, except bulk materials. Include certifications and other data to show compliance with these specifications. B. SAMPLES: For verification purposes, submit the following: 1. Samples for each type of tile and color required, not less than 12" square, on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. TILE 09301-1 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. DELIVER packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. MAINTAIN environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2.01 TILE PRODUCTS: A. GLAZED WALL TILE (Glzn: American Olean or equal as approved. 5/16" x 4-1/4" x 4-1/4", cushion edge. Color and pattern as selected from manufacturer's standards. 1. Provide pregouted sheets of ceramic tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard elastomeric material, at Installer's option. B. UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE (CMoT): American Olean or equal as approved. 1/4" x 2 x 2, cushion edge. Color and pattern as selected from manufacturer's standards. Factory mount tile into units or sheets to facilitate handling and installation. C. TRIM AND SPECIAL SHAPES: Rounded external comers, and trim shapes at head, jamb and sills of openings. Match characteristics of adjoining field tile unless otherwise indicated. 1. Base: Sanitary cove units. 2. Wainscot Cap: Surfaced-bullnose or bullnose cap, except provide regular flat tile where tile surface is flush with plaster wall above. 3. External Comers: Bullnose shapes. 4. Internal Comers: Field-butted square, except use square comer, combination angle and stretcher type cap. D. MARBLE THRESHOLDS: Provide sound Group "A" marble threshold of profile indicated with an abrasive hardness of not less than 10.0, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 241. 1. Furnish white honed marble for thresholds, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT: A. PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT: ANSI A 108.1. B. DRY-SET MORTAR: Factory-sanded portland cement and additives; ANSI A 118.1. Use only the type of dry-set mortar to set types of tile for which they are labeled. C. ORGANIC ADHESIVE: ANSI A 136.1; of proper type for intended use with respect to moisture resistance, tile material and backing as certified by adhesive manufacturer. Tll..E 09301-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Provide primer-sealer where recommended by manufacturer. D. COMMERCIAL CEMENT GROUT: Proprietary compound of portland cement and additives, factory-blended to decrease shrinkage and increase moisture resistance. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. Comply with ANSI-A 118.6. 1. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with requirements include the following: a Upco Co: Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout Joint Filler. b. L&M-Surco: Avid-R Floor Grout. c. Laticrete: Laticrete Floor Grout & Joint Filler. E. DRY-SET GROUT: Proprietary compound composed of portland and additives formulated for the type of tile installed. as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard with ANSI A 118.6. 1. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with requirements include the following: a. Upco Co: Hydroment Dry Tile Grout. b. L&M-Surco: Dry Cure Wall Grout (Unsanded). c. Laticrete: Laticrete Dry Set Wall Grout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TILE INSTALLATION STANDARDS: A. ANSI STANDARDS: Comply with applicable requirements ofthe following, except as otherwise indicated. 1. ANSI A108.1: Tile installed with portland cement mortar. 2. ANSI A108.4: Tile installed with organic adhesive. 3. ANSI A108.5: Tile installed with dry-set portland cement mortar. B TCA INSTALLATION GUIDELINES: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. C. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S instructions for mixing and installation of proprietary materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. EXTEND tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. TILE 09301-3 B. ACCURATELY form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, fInish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fIxtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars. or covers overlap tile. C. PLACEMENT METHODS: Install tile using the following setting beds as shown or scheduled. If not otherwise indicated, use portland cement mortar where thickness and substrate permits. 1. Portland Cement Mortar Bed Installations. a. Dry-set mortar over cured mortar bed. 2. Thin-set Installations: a. Dry-set portland cement mortar. b. Organic adhesive. D. SET MARBLE THRESHOLDS in same type setting bed as field tile unless otherwise indicated. E. JOINTING PATTERN: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. F. EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS Provide openings for joints where shown and to comply with details, or, if not shown and detailed, to comply with recommendations in TeA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". Sealant work is specifIed in Division 7. G. GROUT: 1. Use commercial cement grout for grouting tile wall joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use dry-set grout (Contractor's Option). 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. CLEANING: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile, surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effect of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. FINISHED TILE WORK: Leave fInished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. C. PROTECTION: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.. Protect installed tile work TILE 09301-4 I I I I I I I " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent damage and wear. . 1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days after grouting is completed. 2. Before final inspectio~ remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION TILE 09301-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRA WlNGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK.: A. EXTENT of acoustical ceiling (AC-Cig) is shown and scheduled on drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. INSTALLER; Firm with notless than three years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units. B. FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS: Where required. provide acoustical ceiling components identical to those tested by UL or other testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and applicable to project requirements, for design designation in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or "FM Approval Guide", for floor, roof or beam assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as a fire protective membrane: tested per ASTM C 119. Provide protection materials for lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for rated assembly. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SAMPLES: Set of 12" square samples for acoustical unit required, showing full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. 1. Set of 12" long samples of each exposed runner and molding. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. SPACE ENCLOSURE: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-work in space completed and nominally dry, and until work above ceilings completed and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING UNITS: A. ACOUSTICAL PANELS (Ac Clg): Unless otherwise indicated provide the following: 1.. Size: 24" x 48" x 5/8" rom. (lay-in). 2. Material: Mineral fiber board. 3. Pattern: Fissured (Armstrong "Cortega' or similar as approved). 4. Finish: factory applied, washable vinyl latex paint. 5. NRC Range: .50 -.60, ASTM C 423. 6. STC Range: 35 .39 (Continuous ceiling), ASTM E 90. 7. Light Reflectance: LR-1 (over 75%). 8. Flame Spread: a. 0 .25 ASTM E 84). b. Class A (FS SS-8-118B). c. 25 or under (UL Label). 9. Fire Rated Panels: Where fire-rated assembly is required, provide fire-rated panels with face design to match face design on non-rated panels. 2.02 CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS: A. GENERAL: Comply with ASTMC635, as applicable to type of suspension system required for type of ceiling units indicated. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HV AC equipment, and partition system (if any). 1. Structural Class: Intermediate-duty system unless otherwise required. 2. Provide fire-rated units where required. B. ATTACHMENT DEVICES: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung. 1. HangerWire: Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A 641. soft temper. prestretched, yield-stress load of at least 3 times design load, but not less than 12 gage. C. TYPE OF SYSTEM: Direct-hung suspension system. D. SYSTEM MANUFACTURER: Same as acoustical unit manufacturer or one of the following: 1.. Chicago Metallic Corp. 2. Donn Corp. 3. W. J. Haertel Div.: Leslie-Locke. 4. National Rolling Mills Co. 5. Roblin Bldg. P--oducts. 6. Roper Eastern Bldg. Systems. E. EDGE MOLDINGS: Manufacturer's standard channel molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling, with single flange of molding exposed, with finish matching ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I exposed suspension system. F. EXPOSEDSUSPENSION SYSTEM: Manufacturer's standard exposed runners cross- runners and accessories, of types and profiles indicated, with exposed cross runners coped to lay flush with main runners. 1. Finish of Exposed Members: Provide uniform factory-applied finish on exposed surfaces of ceiling suspension system, including moldings, trim and accessones. a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish, white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE conditions under which acoustical ceiling work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. MEASURE EACH CEILING AREA and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and industry standards applicable to work. B. INSTALL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers near each end and spaced 4-0" along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". 1. Provide additional hangers for support of light fixtures and other items to be supported by the ceiling suspension system, as required to prevent eccentric deflection or rotation of supporting runners. 2. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. C. INSTALL EDGE MOLDINGS of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at-locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 1. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'- ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Q9510-3 0". Miter comers accurately and connect securely. D. INSTALL ACOUSTICAL PANELS in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at comers and at penetrations. 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-4 I I I I I I I ,- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09623 WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This specification covers preparation, materials, services, and equipment required for the application ofPROFESSIONAL@ Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant for projects involving either old or new construction. Any substantial deviations shall be referred to the manufacturer or authorized representative. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04-2200 [04220] - Concrete Masonry Units: Concrete Block walls to receive water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant. B. Section 09-2400 [09220] - Portland Cement Plaster: Cement plaster wall finish to receive water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for the specified water repellents, graffiti resistant coatings and cleaners. Submit description for protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and final cleaning. c. Applicator Qualifications: Submit qualifications of applicator; stating applicator has a minimum of 3 years experience using the specified or a similar products. Provide a list of several most recently completed projects, including project name and location, names of owner and architect, and description of products used, substrates, and method of application. D. Environmental Regulations: Submit applicable environmental regulations. E. VOC Certification: Submit certification that water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings furnished comply with regulations controlling content of volatile organic compounds (VOC). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. 1. Experience in the application of the specified or similar products. 2. 2. Employs persons trained in the application of the specified products or similar products. I I I I I I I " I I I I I I I I I I I B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting 2 weeks before the start of application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect, Applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas' representative. Review environmental regulations, test panel procedures, protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, fmal cleaning, warranty application procedures, and coordination with other work. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations. 1.06 TEST PANELS A. Before full-scale application, review manufacturer's product data sheets to determine the suitability of each product for the specific surfaces. Apply each water repellent and graffiti resistant coating to test panels to determine appropriate strengths, coverage rates, compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures, and desired results. B. Apply graffiti resistant coatings to test panels in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow a minimum of 5 days curing time prior to applying graffiti paint to test panels. Apply graffiti paint to test panels and allow at least 24 hours or longer for paint to cure. Apply cleaner to evaluate ease of graffiti removal. Repeat cycles of cleanings as directed by Architect. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels are inspected and approved by the Architect. C. Submit Sections 1 & 2 of Manufacturer's warranty application using information resulting from test panel application. These sections must be submitted to Manufacturer for approval prior to project commencement. Section 3 to be completed and submitted at project completion. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in original, tightly sealed, unopened containers, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Verify that the product matches that of the original sample applied on the test panel. B. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a cool, dry place. Keep away from sparks and open flame. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface Preparation: Contractor or applicator shall be responsible for providing a clean, dry substrate free from oil, dirt, grease, efflorescence, form release agents or any other coating, which may inhibit penetration and adhesion of water repellent and graffiti resistant coating. This requirement applies to new construction, renovation or remedial projects. Substrate must be completely dry prior to applying product. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature: Product may be applied at any temperature providing that there is no frozen moisture present in the substrate. When applied at temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit the product may cure at a slower rate. Optimal temperature range for application is between 400 F (50 C) or below 950 F (350 C). 2. Do not apply material if the substrate is wet or contains frozen moisture. Allow substrate to dry for a minimum of 48 hours after rain or 72 hours after power washing. 3. Do not apply material during inclement weather or if precipitation is expected within 12 hours. 4. Do not commence application under windy conditions. C. Protection: 1. Special precautions should be taken to avoid fumes from entering the building. Heating and air conditioning, ventilation systems, and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. 2. Protect shrubs, metal, glass, vehicles, and other building hardware from overspray. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 2.01 MANUFACTURER Professional Products of Kansas, Inc., 4456 S. Clifton, Wichita, KS 67216, (800) 676- 7346, (316) 522-9300, Fax (316) 522-9346 2.02 WATER REPELLENT AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS A. Professional@ Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant, Super Strength: First coat in the two- coat process. Depending on the porosity of the substrate, it may be used for the second coat as well. Penetrating silicone rubber graffiti resistant coating for use on vertical concrete, brick, sandstone, limestone, stucco, split face block, concrete block, and fluted block. Non-sacrificial, will withstand repeated cycles of graffiti tagging and removal with no requirement to reapply the sealant. May enhance or darken some substrates. Will not form a surface film or gloss. Inorganic, it is not affected by UV rays, salts, acid rain, etc. Breathable, it allows moisture vapor to escape while preventing liquid penetration. ' Flexible, it bridges hairline cracks and allows for building movement. Provides a graffiti barrier as well as waterproofing protection. 1. Form: Liquid 2. Color: Clear 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4. Percent Active Material: 15% 5. Flash Point: 1050 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I B. Professional@ Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant, Extra Strength: May be used as the second coat in the two-coat process. Porosity of substrate is the determining factor. THE SECOND COAT SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE ENTIRE STRUCTURE TO ACHIEVE WATER REPELLENT PROTECTION IN ADDITION TO GRAFFITI PROTECTION. 1. Form: Liquid 2. Color: Clear 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4. Percent Active Material: 8% 5. Flash Point: 1050 C. The graffiti resistant coating product listed above is selected as a standard of quality. Application procedure and coverage rates must be in conformance with results achieved in test panels and manufacturer's application instructions. 1. Proposed alternate products must be equal in terms of chemical composition and performance standards. Products must be penetrating, permanent treatments using a silicone rubber base and not contain any paraffin waxes, urethanes or polysiloxanes. Silane and siloxane based products will not be considered because of their lack of elongation. Products must be non-sacrificial, allowing for repeated cycles of tagging and cleaning without the requirement to reapply the sealant. 2.04 CLEANERS A. CLEANER: Phase II Cleaner (for graffiti removal), manufactured by Professional Products of Kansas, Inc. No other product will be accepted as they may void the warranty. B. Extra Material: provide one gallon Phase II Cleaner, manufacturer's instructions, MSDS and product data to Owner. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify the following: 1. 1. The required joint sealants have been installed. 2. 2. New masonry and mortar have cured a minimum of28 days. 3. 3. Surface to be treated is clean, dry, and contains no frozen moisture. 4. 4. Environmental conditions are appropriate for application. 3.02 PROTECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A. Protect surrounding areas, glass, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians, vehicles, and non-masonry surfaces during the work from contact with water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Special precautions should be taken to prohibit fumes from entering the building. Heating and air conditioning ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean all dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, eftlorescence, form release agents or any other coating or material from surfaces that may interfere with penetration, performance, adhesion, or aesthetics of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Thoroughly remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Repair, patch, and fill aU cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas in surface as approved by the Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. C. Seal all open joints. D. Allow new masonry and concrete construction and repointed surfaces to cure for a minimum of 28 days before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings to substrates in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, environmental regulations, and application procedures determined from the test panel results approved by the Architect. Graffiti protection requires a two-coat application. In most cases, the first coat will be Super Strength. The second coat will be either Super or Extra, depending on the porosity of the substrate. B. Apply to clean, dry, cured, and properly prepared surfaces approved by Architect. C. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute. D. Do not apply to below-grade surfaces. E. Do not apply to painted surfaces. F. Do not apply anti-graffitiant to horizontal surfaces. G. Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in substrates. 1. Vertical Applications: Apply in a flood coat, from top to bottom, being sure to obtain a 4 to 6 inch rundown of product from the point where the spray makes contact with the surface. Work all the way down the building covering the rundown as you go. Avoid excessive overlapping. Allow first coat to dry to the touch prior to applying second coat. Apply the second coat in the same manner. a. Extremely dense substrates may require back rolling after product is applied to smooth out any rundown lines. b. Brush any excess product that may accumulate on ledges and other areas that may hold excess material. I I I I I ,I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I H. Do not apply to substrates such as asphalt or polystyrene; which may be affected by the solvent carrier. I. Apply material using a high-volume, low pressure, pump-up sprayer (between 40-60 psi), with solvent resistant fittings. Foam roller, or brush of natural bristle or foam may be used in areas where spray application is not appropriate. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Inspect the water repellent and graffiti resistant coating work with the contractor, Architect, applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas representative, and compare with test panel results approved by the Architect Determine if the substrates are suitably protected. Allow the test panel to cure for 5 days prior to applying graffiti paint for testing purposes. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized field representative to verify specified products are used; protection, surface preparation, and application of graffiti resistant coatings are in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions; the test panel has been approved by the Architect. c. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering material performance for a period offive (5) years for graffiti protection and Ten (10) years for Vertical water repellent applications from the date of project completion. 3.06 FINAL CLEANING A. Upon completion of all work covered in the specification, the Contractor shall remove all equipment, material and debris, leaving the area in an undamaged and acceptable condition. Dispose of coating containers according to state and local environmental regulations. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect, all materials, landscaping, and non-masonry surfaces damaged by exposure to water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Professional Products of Kansas, Inc. 4456 S. Clifton Wichita, KS 67216 (800) 676-7346 (316) 522-9300 Fax (316) 522-9346 www.watersealant.com END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I I I I I SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings, in schedules and as specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. MANUFACTURER: Provide eachtype ofresilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants. 1. .Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SAMPLES: Submit 3 samples of each type, color, and finish of resilient flooring required, indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Provide full-size tile units. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. MAINTAIN MINIMUM TEMPERATURE of 650F in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 550F in areas where work is completed. B. INSTALL RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs and environmental conditions must be within limits recommended by manufacturer of products being installed. RESILIENT FLOORlNG 09650-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. ~lJF ACTURER, COLORS AND PATTERNS: Armstrong "Excelon" or equal products as approved and in colors and patterns as selected from manufacturer's standards. B. RESILIENT FLOORING: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) ES SS-T-312, Type IV. a. Size: 12" x 12" x 1/8". C. ACCESSORIES: 1. Resilient Base: Provide base complying with ES SS- W -40, Type II vinyl, with matching end stops and preformed or molded comer units, and as follows: a Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 1/8" gage. c. Style: Standard top-set cove, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected from standard colors available; not less than 1" wide. 3. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. 4. Concrete Slab-Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 5. Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE areas and conditions under which resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. BROOM CLEAN OR V ACUUM surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. 1. Use leveling compound as recommended by floor manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-2 I I I I I I ,I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and ready to receive flooring. 3. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: 1. Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, and edgings. Scribe around obstructions to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and similar openings, and under furnishing and equipment. 2. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within ftnished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. 3. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. 4. Tile in each room shall be laid so that grain in tile is laid in alternate directions, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. B. TILE FLOORS: 1. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. 2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable. C. ACCESSORIES: 1. Apply resilient base to walls, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside comers. Tightly bond base to backing throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 2. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-3 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. REMOVE ANY EXCESS ADHESIVE or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering. B. FINISHING: After completion of project and just prior to fmal inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 I I I I I I I I" I I I I I I I I I ,I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of each type of carpeting (Cpt) is indicated on the drawings, and by specifications, and is defined to include carpet and accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. INSTALLER: Firm with not less than 2 years of carpeting experience, similar to work of this section. B. MANUFACTURER: Firm (carpet mill) with not less than 5 years of production experience with carpet similar to types specified in this section; and whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of products with requirements of this section. C. GENERAL STANDARD: "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by The Carpet and Rug Institute; comply with recommendations which can be reasonably applied to types of carpeting work required. D. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: Deliver 2% of each different carpet required (can be usable scraps of carpet) to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include ron ends of less than 9'- 0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq.ft. area and more than 8" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SAMPLES, CARPETING: Submit 18" x 27" samples of each different carpet required, and 6" length of exposed edge stripping. CARPETING 09680-1 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. DELIVER CARPETING MATERIALS in protective wrappmg, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. PROVIDE SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer (Carpet Mill), agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of carpeting work during 2-year warranty period following substantial completion. Attach copies of product warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET: A. MANUFACTURER, pattern and installation areas are indicated on the Drawings. Direct glue down installation. B. CARPET ACCESSORIES: 1. Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded, vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile indicated; colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry (any manufacturer). 2. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. 3. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet and selected by Installer to meet project circumstances and requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE substrate for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until lUlsatisfactory conditions have been corrected B. CLEAR A WAY DEBRIS and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting. Vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to . ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet. Apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. C. SEQUENCE carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. CARPETING 09680-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL: A. COMPL Y WITH MANUFACTURERS' instructions and recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet. Maintain uniformity of direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. B. EXTEND CARPET under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of such space. C. PROVIDE CUT-OUTS whererequired, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. INSTALL CARPET EDGE GUARD where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. E. EXPANSION JOINTS: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting. Provide for movement. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. REMOVE DEBRIS, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. B. V ACUUM CARPET using commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. C. ADVISE CONTRACTOR of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION CARPETING 09680-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09800 SPECIAL COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of special coating work is shown on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. TillS WORK INCLUDES application of special coating systems to items and surfaces as scheduled, including surface preparation, priming and topcoats. 1. Special coating systems are defined as those types of materials and applications requiring more than normal skills and techniques for mixing, handling and application, as specified in "Painting" section. C. RELATED WORK: 1. General Painting: 2. Concrete: 3. Masonry: Section 09900. Section 03010. Section 04200. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. COORDINATION: Review other sections of these specifications for substrate materials and treatments of substrate materials to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for various substrates. Upon request, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials, to ensure that compatible materials are used. Notify Architect of any anticipated problems using coating systems as specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. GENERAL: Submit the following as specified in Section (01340). B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's technical information including basic materials analysis and installation instructions for each material specified. List each material and cross-reference to the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. SPECIAL COATINGS 09800- I C. SAMPLES: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide 2 samples of each color and texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested until required sheen, color, and texture is achieved. 2. On 4" square masonry, provide 2 samples of each type of fInish and color; defIne fIller, prime and finish coats. 3. On actual exterior wall surfaces duplicate coating fInishes of prepared samples. On at least 100 sq.ft. of surface as directed, provide full-coat finish samples until required sheen, color, and texture is obtained. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. DELIVER materialsin original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer's name. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning and mixing instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. DO NOT apply coatings when thetemperatures of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are below 450P. (7OC), unless otherwise permitted by coating manufacturer's printed instructions. B. DO NOT apply coatings in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by coating manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR SPECIAL COATING SYSTEMS (ESCS): A. MANUFACTURER: "MODAC" solvent type acrylic coatings as indicated or equal products as approved. B. CONCRETE/ESCS-l: 1. Sand texture and color to match Architect's approved sample. 2. 1st Coat: "MO-PLEX" spray applied over normal concrete at approximately 35 sq.ft. per gal. with minimum 15 mu dry thickness. 3. 2nd Coat: "MO-CLEAR" clear solvent type acrylic coating applied as SPECIAL COATINGS 09800-2 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I I I I I recommended by manufacturer to provide an anti-graffiti, waterproofing coating with minimum 1 mil dry thickness. C. MASONRY/ESCS-2: 1. Smooth texture and color to match Architect's approved sample. 2. 1st Coat:"MO-FIL 30" applied by roller at approximately 60 sq.ft. per gal. with minimum 10 mil dry thickness. 3. 2nd Coat: "MODAC #100" applied by roller at approximately 90 sq. ft. per gal. with minimum 8 mil dry thickness. 4. 3rd Coat: "MO-CLEAR" clear solvent type acrylic coating applied as recommended by manufacturer to provide an anti- graffiti, waterproofing coating with minimum 1 mil dry thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. STARTING OF COATINGS WORK. will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within any particular area. B. DO NOT APPLY coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable coating film. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. GENERAL: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in compliance with coating manufacturer's instructions for particular substrate conditions, and as herein specified. B. CEMENTITIOUS SURF ACES: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete and concrete masonry to receive special coatings by removing effiorescense, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening if required to remove glaze. C. DETERMINE alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing appropriate tests. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. GENERAL: Carefully mix and prepare materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions. B. DO NOT MIX coating materials produced by different manufacturers, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. C. STORE materials in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, SPECIAL COATINGS 09800-3 mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. D. STIR. materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as required during application. Do not stir film, which may form on surfaces, into material. Remove film, and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.04 APPLICATION: A. GENERAL: Apply special coatings by brush, roller, spray, squeegee, or other applicators in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for type of material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. B. THE NUMBER OF COATS and paint f1lm thickness required is same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by coating manufacturer. C. APPLY additional coats when undercoats or other conditions show through final coat until the cured film is of uniform fmish, color and appearance. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION: A. CLEAN-UP: During progress of work, remove from project site discarded materials, rubbish, cans and rags resulting from work. B. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, clean all coating-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to damage finished surfaces. C. PROTECTION: Protectwork of other trades against damage. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and recoating, as directed by Architect. Leave work in undamaged condition. D. PROVIDE "WET PAINT' SIGNS as required to protect finishes. After coating application, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work during coatings operation. END OF SECTION SPECIAL COATINGS 09800-4 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of painting work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. THE WORK INCLUDES painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise indicated. C. SURFACE PREPARATION, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of the work. D. "P AlNT' as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other appliedmaterials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. E. P AlNT ALL EXPOSED SURFACES unless otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are designated in "schedules", except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems specified. 1.03 PAINTING NOT INCLUDED: A. THE FOLLOWING CATEGORIES of work are not included as part of the field- applied 'finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications. 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. 2. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, fInished PAINTING 09900- I mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear.and distribution cabinets. 3. Concealed Surfaces; Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas and pipe spaces. 4. Operating Parts and Labels Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting. 5. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT LIST: 1. Submit a complete list of products proposed for use at least thirty (30) days prior to commencement of painting work. 2. Indicate manufacturer, brand name, quality, and type paint for each surface to be finished. 3. Intent of Contractor to use products specified does not relieve him from responsibility of submitting product list. B. SAMPLES: Submit 12" x 12" samples of each color for Architect's review of color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. DELlVERALL MATERIALS to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. PROVIDE LABELS on each container with the following information: 1. Name or title of material. .2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufactmer's name. 4. Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. C. STORE only acceptable painting materials on project site. 1. Store in a lockable area or room, in Contractor's shed or trailer. Do not store in the building. 2. Comply with health and fire regulations. PAINTING 09900-2 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. APPLY WATER-BASE PAINTS only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 500F. and 900 F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint manUfacturer's printed instructions. B. APPL Y SOLVENT -THINNED PAINTS only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 450 F. and 950F unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. C. DO NOT APPL Y PAINT in min, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces: unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. PAINTING may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES: A. P All\T'f COLORS will be as scheduled on the Drawings and selected from the manufacturer's standard color chips. 1. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 2.02 MATERIAL QUALITY: A. PROVIDE the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product, will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of the named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of other acceptable manufacturers. B. PROVIDE UNDERCOAT PAINT produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. C. REFER TO SECTION 09901 - PAINTING SCHEDULE, for material quality requirements. PAINTING 09900-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. APPLICATOR MUST EXAMINE the areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Applicator. 1. Starting of painting work will. be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. GENERAL: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. 1. Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface- applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary. for the complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved. 2. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. B. CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block and cement plaster to be painted by removing all efflorescence chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 1. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If the surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of the finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceed that permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions. C. WOOD: Cleanwood surfaces to be painted of all dirt, oil or other foreign substances withscrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. 1. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job. D. FERROUS METALS: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 1. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or base, where required by PAINTING 09900-4 I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with the same type shop primer. E. GALVANIZED SURF ACES: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with an acceptable non-petroleum based solvent. 3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. MIX AND PREP ARE painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. STORE MATERIALS not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. STIR MATERIALS before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and if necessary, strain the material before using. 3.04 APPLICATION: A. GENERAL: Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grills, with a flat, non-specular black paint. 3. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges the same as the exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. SCHEDULING PAINTING: Apply the first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. 2. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS: Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, of not less than 5.0 mils for the entire coating system if of 3 coat work or not less than 3.5 mils if of2 coat work. PAINTING 09900-5 D. BRUSH APPLICATION: Brush-out and work all brush coats onto the surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Neatly draw all glass lines. 1. Brush apply all primer or first coats, unless otherwise permitted to use mechanical applicators. E. MECHANICAL APPLICATIONS: Use mechanical methods for paint application only when permitted by governing ordinances and trade union regulations. If permitted, limit to only those surfaces impracticable for brush applications. 1. Limit roller applications (generally) to interior wall and ceiling finishes for second and third coats. Apply each roller coat to provide the equivalent hiding as brush- applied. 2. Confine spray application (generally) to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior. 3. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. 4. Do not double back with spray equipment for the purpose of building up film thickness of 2 coasts in one pass. 3.05 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: A. CLEAN-UP: During the progress of the work, remove from the site all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day. 1. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. B. PROTECTION: Protect work of other trades. whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. 1. Provide "WET PAINT" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. 2. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION P AlNTING 09900-6 I I I I I I I I" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09901 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. SURF ACES shall be painted with the type paints and number of coats as hereinafter scheduled. B. PROVIDE FIRST LINE P AlNTS OF MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED BELOW: 1. Pratt & Lambert 2. Benjamin Moore Company 3. Devoe 4. Sherwin Williams 5. Glidden C. PROVIDE FIRST LINE STAINS OF MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED BELOW: 1. Olympic 2. Cabots 3. Devoe 4. Pratt & Lambert EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (EPS): CONCRETE. srucco, AND MASONRY: (Other than concrete masomy units). EPS-1: 2-COA T ACRYLIC FINISH (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) 1 st Coat - Acrylic emulsion. 2nd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: EPS-4: 2-COAT ACRYLIC EMULSION (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) OVER FILLER COAT 1st Coat - Surface filler. 2nd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. 3rd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. PAlNTING SCHEDULE 09901-1 PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CURB & P A VE:MENT PAINT: EPS-5: 2-COAT CHLORINATED RUBBER-ALKYD, FS TT-P-115, TYPE III. 1 st Coat 2nd Coat ASBESTOS CEMENT EPS-6: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH OVER PRIMER 1 st Coat - Primer undercoat. 2nd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. 3rd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. Not less than 3.5 mils dry film thickness. GENERAL PAINTED WOOD: EPS-7: 2-COAT ALKYD (GLOSS) FINISH OVER PRIMER 1 st Coat - Primer undercoat. 2nd Coat - Exterior alkyd enamel. 3rd Coat - Exterior alkyd enamel. Not less than 3.5 mils dry film thickness. EPS-8: 2-COAT (LOW LUSTER) FINISH OVER PRIMER 1 st Coat - Primer undercoat. 2nd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. 3rd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. PAINTED WOOD TRIM: EPS-9: ALKYD (FULL GLOSS) FOR DEEP COLORS 1 st Coat - Primer undercoat. 2nd Coat - Alkyd trim enamel. 3rd Coat - Alkyd trim enamel. PAINTED WOOD SHAKES AND ROUGH SIDING: EPS-lO: 2-COA T SELF-PRIMING ALKYD-OIL (LOW LUSTER) FINISH 1 st Coat - Alkyd-oil paint. 2nd Coat - Alkyd-oil paint. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PAINTED PLYWOOD: EPS-II: 2-COA T (FLAT) FINISH OVER PRIMER 1st Coat - Surface sealer. 2nd Coat - Primer undercoat. 3rd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. 4th Coat - Acrylic emulsion. STAINED WOOD: EPS-I2: STAINED VARNISH (FULL GLOSS) FINISH I st Coat - Exterior oil stain. 2nd Coat - Exterior spar varnish. 3rd Coat - Exterior spar varnish. 4th Coat - Exterior spar varnish. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before first varnish coat. EPS-I3 : STAIN (FLAT), NO FINISH COATS 1st Coat - Exterior Latex Stain (solid color). NATURAL FINISH WOOD: EPS-I4: VARNISH (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH I st Coat - Exterior spar varnish. 2nd Coat -Exterior spar varnish. 3rd Coat - Exterior spar varnish. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before first varnish coat. FERROUS METAL: EPS-I5: ALKYD (FULL GLOSS) ENAMEL 1 st Coat - Red lead pigmented primer 2nd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel. 3rd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel. First coat not required on items delivered shop primed. PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-3 PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I EPS-16: ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) ENAMEL: 1 st Coat - Red lead pigmented primer. 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel. 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel. First coat not required on items delivered shop primer. EPS-17: ALKYD (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) ENAMEL 1st Coat - Red lead pigmented primer. 2nd Coat - Lusterless alkyd enamel. 3rd Coat - Lusterless alkyd enamel First coat not required on items delivered shop primed. EPS-18: ALKYD TRIM ENAMEL (GLOSS) DEEP COLORS 1 st Coat - Zinc-yellow iron oxide primer. 2nd Coat - Alkyd gloss enamel. 3rd Coat - Alkyd gloss enamel. First coat not required on items delivered shop primed. EPS-19: SILICONE-ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Zinc chromate alkyd primer. 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss silicone alkyd enamel. 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss silicone alkyd enamel. ZINC COATED METAL: EPS-20: ALKYD ENAMEL (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer. 2nd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel. 3rd Coat - High gloss alkyd enameL First coat not required on items delivered shop primed. ALUMINUM: EPS-21: ALKYD ENAMEL (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Zinc chromate primer. 2nd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel. 3rd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (IPS): CONCRETE AND MASONRY: (Other than concrete masonry units) IPS-I: 2-COA T LUSTERLESS (FLAT) FINISH 1 st Coat - interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. IPS-2: ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Interior enamel undercoat. 3rd Cot - Interior enamel, semi-gloss. Not less than 3.5 mils total dry film thickness. IPS-3: 2-COA T (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) FINISH 1 st Coat - Acrylic emulsion. 2nd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. IPS-4: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Polyester epoxy. 3rd Coat - Polyester epoxy. Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness. CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: IPS-5: EMULSION (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) OVER FILLED CMU SURFACE 1st Coat - Surface filler. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 3rd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. IPS-6: ALKYD ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Surface filler. 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoater. 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel. Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. Not less than 3.5 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-5 IPS-7: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH 1st Coat - Surface filler. 2nd Coat - Polyester epoxy. 3rd Coat - Polyester epoxy. Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled and with a smooth monolithic finish. Not less than 4.0 miles dry film thickness, excluding first coat. MASONRY: (Other than concrete and concrete masonry units). IPS-8: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH 1st Coat - Shellac-pigmented primer. 2nd Coat - Polyester epoxy. 3rd Coat - Polyester epoxy. Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. ASBESTOS CEMENT: IPS-9: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH 1 st Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. GYPSUM DRY\V ALL SYSTEMS: IPS-tO: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH I st Coat - Latex primer. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. IPS-II: ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) ODORLESS: 1 st Coat - Latex primer. 2nd Coat - Alkyd enamel 3rd Coat - Alkyd enamel. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-I2: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH I st Coat - Latex primer. 2nd Coat - Polyester epoxy. 3rd Coat - Polyester epoxy. Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness. PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PLASTER: IPS-13: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH: 1st Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. IPS-I4: 2-COAT{FLAT) FINISH I st Coat - Acrylic emulsion. 2nd Coat - Acrylic emulsion. IPS-IS: ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) 1 st Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoat. 3rd Coat - Odorless alkyd enamel. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-16: ENAMEL (FULL GLOSS) 1 st Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoat. 3rd Coat - Gloss enamel. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-I7: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH 1st Coat - Latex primer. 2nd Coat - Polyester epoxy. 3rd Coat - Polyester epoxy. ACOUSTICAL PLASTER: IPS-I8: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH 1 st Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-7 PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I FERROUS METAL: IPS-19: (FLAT) FINISH 1 st Coat - Red lead primer. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 3rd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. First coat not required on items that are shop primer. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-20: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Red lead primer. 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoater. 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss enamel. First coat not required on items that are shop primed. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-21: (FULL GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Red lead primer. 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoater. 3rd Coat - Gloss enamel. First coat not required on items that are shop primed. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. ZINC COATED METAL: IPS-22: (FLAT) FINISH 1st Coat - Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. 3rd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-23: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer. 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoat. 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss enamel. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-24: (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer. 2nd Coat - Enamel undercoat. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3rd Coat - Gloss enamel. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. fi1 PAINTED WOODWORK AND HARDBOARD: IPS-25: 3-COAT (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Enamel undercoat. 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss enamel. 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss enamel. IPS-26: 3-COAT (FULL GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Enamel undercoat. 2nd Coat - Gloss enamel. 3rd Coat - Gloss enamel. STAINED WOODWORK: IPS-27: STAIN - VARNISH (SATIN) FINISH 1 st Coat - Compatible interior stain. 2nd Coat - Urethane varnish. 3rd Coat - Urethane varnish. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before first varnish coat. NATURAL FINISH WOODWORK: IPS-29: VARNISH (RUBBED) FINISH 1 st Coat - Bleached shellac. 2nd Coat - Rubbing varnish. 3rd Coat - Rubbing varnish. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before first varnish coat. CONCRETE FLOOR: IPS-31: PIGMENTED POLYURETHANE (FULL GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Concrete conditioner. 2nd Coat - Polyurethane coating. 3rd Coat - Polyurethane coating. PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-9 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I WOOD FLOORS: IPS-32: CLEAR POLYURETHANE (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH. 1 st Coat - Stain and filler as indicated. 2nd Coat - Clear polyurethane. 3rd Coat - Clear polyurethane. COTTON OR CANVAS COVERING OVER INSULATION: IPS-33: LATEX EMULSION "SIZE" (FLAT) 1st (Size Coat) - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew-proof. PAINTING SCHEDULE 09901-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsIons of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows: 1. Type: Solid phenolic. 2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored. B. Related Sections include the following: I."Toilet Room Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, feminine napkin disposal units, and similar accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations,. sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment_mounted toilet accessories. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or screen indicated. 3. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 4jnch (IOO_rom) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (no substitution nor or equals). 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable. B. Solid_Plastic, Phenolic Core: Solid phenolic core with melamine facing on both sides, fused to substrate without visible glue line or seam. Provide units with eased edges and with minimum 3/4_ inch (19_ rom) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2_ inch (13 _rom) thick panels and screens. Provide melamine color as follows: 1. Color: One color in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. No more than three colors shall be selected for anyone building's toilet partitions. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 rom) thick and 3 inches (75 rom) high, finished to match hardware. 1. For solid-'plastic, polymer_resin pilasters, in lieu of stainless_steel pilaster shoes and sleeves, manufacturer's standard plastic pilaster shoes and sleeves may be provided. D. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U _brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: 1. Material: Chrome-'plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear_anodized aluminum. 2. Material: Stainless steel. 3. Material: Chrome-'plated brass. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Full_Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: 1. Material: Clear anodized aluminum. F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy_duty operating hardware and accessories of the following material: 1. Material: Stainless steel. G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded_aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish. H. Heat_Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded_aluminum strip in manufacturer's standard finish. I. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft_resistant_type heads. Provide sex_type bolts for through_bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot_dip galvanized or other rustJesistant, protective_coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment_mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment_mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Overhead_Braced _and_Floor_Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion_resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Wall_Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated. D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24_inch (61O_mm) wide in_swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and nominal 32_inch (813_mm) wide out_swinging doors with a minimum 32_inch (813_mm) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard selC closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface_mounted latch unit with combination rubber_faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber_tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment_mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber_tipped bumpers at out_swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out_swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 2.5 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard No.3 or No.4 directional polish. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/4 inch (6mm) between doors and pilasters, 1/2 inch(13 mm) between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead_Braced _ and_Floor_Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in_swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outywinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART I-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of each type of toilet accessory is shown on the drawings and schedules. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. DELIVER ACCESSORIES to the job in protective cartons; store in a safe place protected against damage. 1.04 COORDINATION: A. COORDINATE with Section 06100 . Rough Carpentry for the accurate location of all wood blocking required for the anchoring of toilet room accessories. PART - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. TOILET ACCESSORIES: Provide toilet room accessories as specified on the Drawings by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., or an approved equal by Bradley Corp., Accessory Specialties, Inc., or approved equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the areas and conditions under which accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. TOILET ACCESSORlES 10800-1 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. PROVIDE anchors, bolts and other necessary anchorages, and attach accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed. B. INSTALL concealed mounting devices and fasteners where possible, fabricated of the same material as the accessories, or of galvanized steel as recommended by manufacturer. C. INSTALL exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the accessories. Use theft-resistant fasteners. D. SECURE ACCESSORIES to adjacent walls and partitions complying with the manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction. END OF SECTION roll..ET ACCESSORlES 10800-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10905 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of miscellaneous specialty work is shown on the Drawings and as specified. B. RELATED WORK.: 1. Wood Blocking, Grounds and Furring: Section 06100. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. GEl\TERAL: Submit the following as specified in Section (01340). B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for all items in this section unless otherwise directed. C. SAMPLES: Submit samples of finishes, etc., for items of this section only as necessary for approval and as requested. D. PRODUCT DATA: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical data, detail drawings, and installation instructions for items of this section. Transmit copy of instructions to the Installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS PANELS: A. FLUSH PANEL ACCESS DOORS: Provide ceiling/wall access panels in size and quantity as indicated on drawings. Provide standard flush access doors as manufactured by InrycolMilcor or equal products as approved. Fire rated panels shall be provided in fire rated ceiling/wall with fire rating necessary to maintain fire rating of ceiling/wall. Doors shall be the style required as recommended by manufacturer, to be built into the type of ceiling/wall finish where they are indicated. Each door shall have a flush, key operated, cylinder lock (with 2 keys). Construct doors with-16 gage steel frames, 14 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10905-1 gage panels, and 22 gage casing beads where required. Finish doors with chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel. 2.02 ROOF SCUTTLE: A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: 1. The Bilco Company is specified, comparable products by one of the following will be acceptable. a. Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Co. b. Naturalite, Inc. c. Plasteco, Inc. d. Wasco Products, Inc. B. DESCRIPTION: 1. Construction: Galvanized steel construction, 14 ga. cover and curb, 22 ga. cover liner. Curb height, 12" with 3 1/2" flange. Provide 1" rigid fiber board insulation in curb and 1" glass fiber insulation in cover. 2. Size: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Style: Bilco S-20. 2.03 DOCK BUMPERS: A. MANUFACTURER: Durable Mat Company or equal products as approved. B. DESCRIPTION: Laminated Tread dock bumper units of size indicated, fabricated of. multiple plies cut from fabric-reinforced rubber truck tires to a uniform thickness. Laminate plies under pressure on 3/4" diameter steel supporting rods which are welded and bolted to 1/4" thick structural steel angle closures with predrilled anchor holes. Size angles to provide not less than 1" of tread plies extending beyond face of closure angles. 1. Thickness of Tread Plies: Not less than 4-1/2". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE substrate and conditions under which specialties are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10905-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. WORK shall conform to approved shop drawings. B. INSTALLATIONS shall be made plumb, level and true to line C. COOPERATE with other trades so that work is properly coordinated. D. PROVIDE all necessary trim, hardware, and accessories for a complete installation. E. MANUFACTURER'S installation recommendations shall be complied with except as specifically indicated otherwise. 3.03 CLEANING: A. UPON COMPLETION leave work in a neat, clean condition. Remove all debris caused by this work as directed. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10905-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS; A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of plumbing work is indicated on the Drawings. B. IN GENERAL, the work consists of, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 2. A system of soil, waste and vent piping. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 4. Furnishing lead flashings for penetrations through the roof. 5. Connections of equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA: A. SUBMIT to the Architect for approval, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of brochures, technical data and/or shop drawings of the following: 1. Plumbing fixtures with trim. 2. Floor drains. 3. Hose bibbs with vacuum breaker. 1.04 CHANGES: A. THE DRAWINGS indicate generally the locations of plumbing fixtures, apparatus, piping, etc., and while these are to be followed as closely as possible, if before installation it is found necessary to change the location of same to accommodate the conditions at the building, such changes shall be made without additional cost to the Owner and as directed by the Architect. 1.05 PRODUCTS & INSTALLATION: A. THE PLUMBING MATERIALS, FIXTURES AND INSTALLATION shall comply with all requirements of Florida State Board of Health's Sanitary Code, Chapter 17C entitled "Plumbing", the Local Plumbing Code and State and County Energy Efficiency Code. PLUMBING 15400-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING: A. ALL MATERIALS shall comply with latest ASTM specifications in each instance that ASTM has specifications and standards relating to such material. B. DRAINAGL WASTE AND VENT PIPING: One of the following: 1. ABS-DWV Pipe and Fittings -ASTM D 2661. 2. PVC-DWV Pipe and Fittings .ASTM D 2665. C. SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS (outside buildings): One of the following: 1. ABS, ASTM D 2751. 2. PVC, ASTM D 3033 or D 3034. D. SOLVENT CEMENT for Plastic Pipe): 1. ABS-DWV Solvent CementASTM C 2235. 2. PVC-DWV Solvent Cement ASTM D 2564. E. DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Copper Tubing Type 'IL" (ASTM B 88) with Bronze or Wrought Copper solder joint fittings. F. FURNISH AND INSTALL dielectric or isolation fittings at all points where copper pipe connects to wrought iron or steel pipe. G. EXPOSED PIPE IN TOILET ROOMS: Chrome plated brass, American Brass Co., or equivalent. Furnish and install chrome plated wall plates. H. LAVATORY AND SIMILAR WASTE ARMS: Type M or L copper water tube, Mueller, or equivalent. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS: A. ADIDST ABLE wrought clevis type hanger and rods: Grinnell Company, or equivalent. 2.03 CLEANOUTS: A. FLOOR CLEANOUTS for soil and waste lines shall have bodies of standard pipe sizes. 1. Exterior: Josam Y-300-F. 2. Interior: Josam Y-lOO-B with nickel bronze top, or equivalent Wade or Zurn, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. B. WALL CLEANOUTS for soil and waste lines shall have bodies of standard pipe sizes. 1. Ferrule: Cast iron with a brass plug. 2. Plug: Drilled and tapped to receive cleanout screw. 3. Access Cover: Round polished cast brass with countersunk brass screw. Josam Y- PLUMBING 15400-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 120-B, or equivalent Wade or Zum. 2.04 VALVES: A. GATE VALES: 150 pound, screwed, all brass. Crane Co. No. 431, or equivalent. B. UNIONS shall have brass to metal ground joint seat. 2.05 TRAPS: A. FOR LA V A TORIES AND SINKS: Brass, chrome plated. B. FOR SERVICE SINKS: Cast iron, enameled inside. C. FOR FLOOR DRAINS: Cast iron traps not integral with the floor drain. 2.06 PIPE SLEEVES: A. GALVANIZED STEEL Size to allow minimum clearance between pipe and sleeves or insulation and sleeves. 2.07 ESCUTCHEON PLATES; A. PROVIDE chrome plated escutcheon plates where exposed pipe passes through walls, floors, or ceiling in finished area. 2.08 FLOOR DRAINS: A. JOSAM AS SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS: Wade or Zum equivalent approved. 2.09 FIXTURE TRIM AND FITTINGS: A. PROVIDE all items of brass and chrome plated finish except where otherwise noted. B. FOR FASTENING on masonry, use expansion bolts or screws. C. ALL PIPING that serves fixtures and is exposed beyond the face of the finished wall: Brass and chrome plated. D. BRACKETS, ANCHORS AND CLEATS: Furnish and install where required for support; conceal behind finished wall. 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES: A. FURNISH AND INSTALL all plumbing fixtures as shown on the Drawings. Fixtures shall be as specified, or equivalent quality fixtures by American Standard, Kohler, PLUMBING 15400-3 Crane or Eljer. B. HOSE BIBBS: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.11 PLUMBING STOPS: A. CHROME PLATED BRASS with renewable valves, seats and stem seals. 2.12 PROTECTIVE COATING: A. COAL-TAR ENAMEL, AWWA-C-203. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING: A. ON VERTICAL sanitary drain lines, connect all soil and waste inlets through sanitary tees, wyes, or wyes and eighth bends. Short radius fittings may be used for vent piping. On horizontal lines, connect all waste and soil connections through wyes, or wyes and eighth bends. Double branch fittings may be used on vertical lines and horizontal runs providing proper grades can be maintained. B. LAY HORIZONTAL DRAIN PIPES to uniform grade; riser pipes, vertical. Make changes in directions of drain pipes with long bends. C. LAY ALL SEWERS and branches, where practicable, on undisturbed earth cut at oroper grade. Where laid on fill, provide adequate supports to maintain pitch of the line. D. PITCH all horizontal drains 1/8" per foot minimum. E. MAKE JOINTS IN PLASTIC PIPE using the specified solvent cement. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. F. SIZES ORRISERS and mains of water system piping shall be as designated on the Drawings. Verify any omitted sizes before installation. In general, pipe shall be sized to insure adequate flow in the branches, especially in regard to flush valves. Pitch hot water lines to facilitate drainage at fixtures. G. COVER PIPE openings at all times that the work is not in progress at that point. H. CUTBRASS AND COPPER pipe by means of hacksaw. Remove all burrs and metal chips, dirt. etc., before joining pipe. Chrome plated pipe shall show no wrench marks after installation; no threads shall show. I. SOLDER COPPER WATER PIPING JOINTS witha 95-5 ti:Q-antimony solder. Provide PLUMBING 15400-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I sweat solder joints made so that the solder ring is visible completely around the joint. Do not use acid core flux. J. ADEQUATELY SUPPORT all piping above floors inside the building from or on the building structure. Support piping suspended from the building structure by means of the specified pipe hangers and rods. Make maximum spacing between pipe supports as follows: Nominal Pipe Size 3/4"and under I" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" Maximum Span 5' 7' 7' 9' 10' 11' 12' 14' 3.02 INSTALLATION OF VALVES: A. ISOLATE ALL MAJOR PIPING assemblies as shown on the Drawings and as required for proper operation and maintenance. All valves shall be accessible. Provide valve boxes and access panels where required for accessibility. B. PLACE SHlIT -OFF VALVE on each water main service. Place valve near the building where indicated on the Drawings, in concrete or cast iron box with a removable cast iron plate cover. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRAPS: A. TRAP EACH FIXTURE by water sealing trap placed as near the fixture as possible. B. VENT ALL TRAPS and place within 5 feet of the fixture which it serves, unless otherwise noted. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES: A. INSTALL PIPE SLEEVES at all locations where pipe passes through walls, floors, or ceiling above or below grade. B. WHERE SUBJECT to moisture or weather, seal sleeves with watertiqht sealant. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF AIR CHAMBERS: A. INSTALL an air chamber at each fixture or group of fixtures. Make air chambers 20 pipe diameters long and of the same diameter as the pipe to which it is connected. In no case shall an air chamber be less than 18" long. Air chamber must be installed PLUMBING 15400-5 vertically above the horizontal pipe to which it is connected. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURE TRIM AND FITTINGS; A. INSTALL THE FIXTURE trim and fittings specified, taking care to properly anchor each fixture. B. WHEN THE USE of a wrench is necessary on chromium plated piping, protect the pipe from marring by use of felt or cloth wrapping beneath wrench jaws. 3.07 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATING: A. COAT METAL PIPE buried in the earth or concealed with heavy coat of coal tar enamel. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF PIPE INSULATION: A. INSULATE ALL HOT WATER piping above and below grade in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Use 112" Armaflex or equal. 3.09 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. MAKE ALL WATER and air tests of the piping systems in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect or his designed representative. Conduct these tests at such places and with timing to permit work to proceed with as little interruption as possible. Make tests before work is concealed. B. TEST WATER piping to hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi and hold for 24 hours. C. AFTER THE INSTALLATION of sanitary piping and before the pipe is concealed or the fixtures are installed, cap or plug the ends of the system and fill all lines with water to top of vents above roof and allow to stand until a thorough inspection has been made. Should leaks appear, repair and repeat the tests until the system is tight. 3.10 STERILIZATION: THE STERILIZATION PROCESS shall comply with all governing regulations and with the sterilization procedures recommended by the American W ater Works Association. The chlorination process may be simplified by first flushing the system thoroughly clean, then charging with water containing a. minimum of 50 parts per million of chlorine, allowing this to stand for 24 hours, then thoroughly flushing. After sterilization and fmal flushing, the local health authority is to be notified, and their approval obtained in writing. I I I I I I I, I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTTON 15500 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND VENTILATING PART I-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS: DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: A. THE EXTENT of the mechanical work is indicated on the Drawings. B. IN GENERAL, the work consists of but is not limited to the following: 1. Air Conditioning and heating units. 2. Ceiling exhaust fans. 3. Grilles, registers and diffusers. 4. Controls. 5. Ductwork. 6. . Flashing. 7. Electric heaters. 1.03 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION: A. ELECTRICAL WIRING, including control wiring, starters and disconnects are specified in Section 16000 Electrical. 1.04 SUBMITTAL DATA: A. SUBMIT TO THE ARCHITECT for approval in accordance with Section 01340, copies of the equipment brochures, technical data and/or shop drawings of the following: 1. Air Conditioning and heating units. 2. Ceiling exhaust fans. 3. Grilles, registers and diffusers. 4. Controls. 5. Insulation. 6. Electric heaters. 7. Dampers. AIR CONDITIONING. HEATING AND VENTILATING 15500-1 1.05 NOISEANDVIDRATION: EQUIPMENT SHALL OPERATE quietly and the design of the base shall be such that the operation of the equipment shall cause no perceptive vibration in the flooring adjacent to the equipment, nor cause, directly or indirectly, vibration or objectional noise in any other portion of the building and/or in the building structure itself. 1.06 FLASHING: A. ALL SPECIAL FLASHING required for penetration of roof surfaces by HV AC vents, pipes, etc. shall be furnished by this contractor for installation by roofing contractor. Flashing shall be in accordance with the Roofing Section of the Specifications, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1.07 FOUNDATIONS: A. FURNISH ALL FOUNDATIONS for equipment covered in this Specification, as a part of this Section. unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1.08 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. FURNISH 2 SETS of complete operating instructions covering entire heating, ventilating and air conditioning system. Include a copy of the Control Diagrams and a complete description of the operation of the Control System. Instruct designated representative in proper operation and care of system. 1.09 WARRANTIES: A. FURNISH a 5 year warranty onall compressors and a one year service (including labor) and guarantee on all controls, equipment and material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL WORK: (See Para. 2.03 for optional fibrous glass duct.) A. SUPPL Y SHEET METAL WORK in the heating, air conditioning and/or ventilation systems in accordance with ASHRAE Standards. B. ROVIDE OFFSETS, elbows and transformations in ductwork where necessary, whether or not shown. C. CONSTRUCT ductwork of galvanized sheet steel. D. USE WEIGHTS, bracing, joints and all details m accordance with ASHRAE recommendations. AIR CONDITIONING. REA TING AND VENTILATING 15500-2i I I I I I I 'I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I E. RECTANGULAR ducts over 12~ wide shall be cross broken except where ductwork is to be insulated. F. MAKE INTERIOR of ducts smoothand joints air tight. Where necessary to insure tightness, caulk joints. Make the entire installation rigid with ductwork free from rattles and air noises when in operation. G. MAKE ELBOWS with inside radius equal to the width of the duct except where otherwise specified or necessitated by unavoidable space conditions. Where inside radius is less than three-fourths the duct width, multiple turning vans shall be provided. Provide square elbows with Tuttle and Bailey "Ducturns" or Barber-Colman "Airtums". H. INCLUDED angle of divergence for enlargement is not to exceed 150 where space conditions permit. Included ANGLE OF CONVERGENCE for contracting is not to exceed 300. I. PROVIDE flexible duct connections in ducts as indicated; make with woven fiberglass cloth collars not less than 2" long. Secure fiberglass cloth to the duct and fan connections by galvanized channels. Provide a braided copper bridge strap across flexible connections. J. INSTALL REGISTERS, grilles and diffusers as indicated. K. SUPPLY Barber-ColmanCo. "Deflectrols", or Tuttle & Bailey "Santrols" with all diffusers, registers and where otherwise indicated. L. WHERE EXHAUST REGISTERS open from the same duct into two or more rooms, they must be offset or baffled to prevent transmission of light or sound. M. DIMENSIONS indicated on drawings are free area. Where ducts are lined, increase dimensions to accommodate insulation thickness. 2.02 FLEXIBLE DUCT: A. THERMALLY INSULATED flexible duct tested and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as Class 1 Air Duct, and labeled in accordance with UL 181 "Standards for Air Ducts". 2.03 FIBROUS GLASS DUCT optional in lieu of sheet metal duct): A. DUCT BOARD must be in compliance with NFPA 90A and labeled UL 181, Class 1. 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thermal Conductance (k): 0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature. 3. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) 0.70 per ASTM C 423-66T with #6 mounting. 4. Manufacturerffype: Manville Type 475 with HDF facing Micro-Aire Duct Board AIR CONDITIONING. REA TING AND VENTILATING 15500-3 AIR CONDITIONING. HEATING AND VENTILATING 15500-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I or approved equivalent. B. FABRICATE fibrous glass duct in accordance with SMACNA and manufacturer's fabrication manual. 2.04 MANUAL DAMPERS: A. PROVIDE MANUAL louver dampers where shown on the Drawings and where necessary for the proper regulation of the air handling system, and so locate as to be accessible after the building is completed, i.e., by removing a marked tile, access panel or other approved method. Dampers shall be Air Balance No. 116, or approved equivalent. B. MANUAL LOUVER dampers shall have rigid channel frames; #16 U.S. gauge galvanized blades not over 10" wide; bronze sleeve bearings and interlinkage. C. WHERE LOUVER dampers or splitter dampers are located in concealed ducts, provide with model 301, 302, 900 or 914 operators, as required. Manufacturer: Young Regulator Company or approved equivalent. D. FOR ALL OTHER manual dampers, provide a hand lever with a quadrant and set screw. Provide bearings at both ends of the shaft. Clearly mark all damper operators to indicate "open" and "closed" positions. Mark outside air dampers to show outside air settings. 2.05 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS (Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings): A. PATTERN, arrangement and size indicated on the Drawings are Titus. Tuttle & Bailey or Barber-Colman of equivalent appearance and performance will be acceptable. Performance shall be certified by Air Diffusion Council. B. DIFFUSERS: Titus TDC-S4, with V.C.D. and air deflectors. C. RETURN AIR GRILLES: Titus TH50 aluminum. D. DOOR GRILLES: Titus CT-700-BF aluminum. 2.06 DUCT INSULATION: A. INSULATE all sheet metal supply and return ducts with 2" foil-Faced flexible fiberglass. Apply insulation as per manufacturer's instructions. All joints shall be taped and sealed. 2.07 BOLTS, INSETS, SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS: A. INSTALL INSERTS, bolts, expansion shields, beam clamps and hangers for supporting pipes, ducts, etc. Where placed in new slabs, cooperate in placement before slab is I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I poured. Bean clamps, hangers, etc; Grinnel or approved equivalent. B. INSTALL sleeves where pipes pass through walls or floors. Sleeves: Preformed VC galvanized steel or wrought iron pipe. Cut sleeves passing through walls and floors above grade flush with the wall. Install sleeves of sufficient diameter to allow for expansion and contraction and pipe covering. C. INSTALL SLEEVES passing through floor slabs of sufficient size to allow for packing with Oakum and pouring with hot tar. D. SLEEVE INSTALLATION shall comply with the regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, with National Fire Protection Association, or local authority. E. PROVIDE nickle plated, cast iron escutcheons where pipes pass through floors, ceiling or walls in finished areas. 2.08 MOTORS: A. MOTORS for all equipmentcovered by this Section of the Specifications shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. B. MOTOR H.P., voltage, etc. as indicated on the Drawings. C. OPEN FRAME MOTORS shall be rated on a 400 C. temperature rise basis: totally enclosed motor shall be rated on a 550 C. temperature rise basis. The load to which each motor is. connected shall not cause the motor running current to exceed the nameplate amperage. D. MOTORS: Induction type of design suited to the service for which they are used unless otherwise specified. E. MOTORS: General Electric, or approved equivalent. 2.09 CEILING EXHAUST FANS: A. AS INDICA TED, or approved equivalent. 2.10 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: A. TRANE or Carrier. Compressorsshall have 5 year warranty. Provide roof curb, thermostat, down-flow section, two sets of fIlters, and low-ambient down to 200 F. Furnish roof mounted units complete with factory fabricated roof curbs. 2.11 ELECTRIC HEATERS: A. PROVIDE electric heaters as indicated on the Drawings. AIR CONDITIONING. HEATING AND VENTILATING 15500-5 B. HEATERS SHALL BE COMPLETE with terminal block, control contactors, automatic reset hi-limit, manual reset hi-limit, fuse blocks and back-up contactors. All components shall be in metal enclose and factory wired. C. HEATERS SHALL HA VB maximum of 48 amps per circuit and each such circuit shall be provided with fuse block and back-up contactor. Back-up contactor shall break all underground lines, shall be operated by the manual reset-hi-limit thermostat and shall override all other safety controls. D. HEATERS SHALL BE U.L. labeled and shall meet national and local electrical codes. Heaters shall be full area of duct. E. HEATERS SHALL BE as manufactured by Electric Heaters, Inc., or equivalent ILG, Tennessee Plastics, or Valley Industries, Inc. 2.12 CONTROLS: A. AS SPECIFIED on the Drawings and furnished with air conditioning and heating units. 2.13 PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES & EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. AS SPECIFIED in Section 07800. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK: A. INSTALL in accordance with SMACNA and manufacturer's recommendations. B. INSTALLATION SHALL BE rigid and ductwork free from rattles and air noise when in operation. C. FLEXIBLE DUCT: 1.. Install only where indicated. 2. Install in fully extended condition free of sags or kinks. using only minimum length required to make connection. Bend greater than 90 degrees not allowed. 3. Do not exceed 12 feet in length from supply air duct. 3.02 SUPERVISION OF ELECTRICAL WORK: A. THIS CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for supervision of all wiring (including control wiring) of equipment included in this Section and shall furnish all necessary diagrams required, including control wiring diagrams. AIR CONDITIONING. REA TING AND VENTILATING 15500-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.03 PIPING, EQUIPMENT, ETC.: A. ENTIRE INSTALLATION shall be in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and applicable requirements of the manufacturers of the equipment and shall perform satisfactorily at the completion of the work. B. ALL PENETRATIONS of roof by piping shall be made through pipe curb assemblies or within roof mounted equipment factory fabricated curbs. C. ALL MECHANICAL equipment located on the roof, including AlC units and refrigeration condensing units (if any), both Contractor and Owner supplied, shall be installed on factory fabricated curbs, prefabricated equipment support units or combination equipment basis, as appropriate. 3.04 PAINTING: A. EXCEPT as specified herein, all painting will be done under other sections of specifications. Leave work free from rust, dirt, grease and plaster. B. EQUIPMENT with factory applied finish shall have scratches, chips. etc. primed and touched-up with materials which will protect the surface and match adjacent areas. 3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS; A. UPON COMPLETION of work, clean, oil and grease all fans, motors, other running equipment and apparatus and make certain that all such apparatus and mechanisms are in proper working order and made ready for test. 3.06 TEST AND BALANCE: A. EACH SYSTEM shall be balanced to assure design performance. After final installation of all equipment, a complete test and balance shall be performed on all air distribution. B. FURNISH a letter from equipment manufacturer that all controls have been checked for operation and calibration and that the system is operating as intended. C. PROVIDE a certified air balance report for system, performed by a member of Associate Air Balance Council. END OF SECTION AIR CONDITIONING. HEATING AND VENTILATING 15500-7 I I SECTION 16000 I 14'1 Er.....l.RIrAT .A.:.i..ii..J --- ..&............... ..... I PART I-GENERAL I 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: I A. DRA.. WLNGS A..1\ID GENER;\l PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions a..lld Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. I 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF 'WORK: I ~A. FUF..NISH ALL LABOR., materials., eauimnent 3..'1d accessories necessary to inst~!ll1 a complete and properly operating electrical system which includes an electrical work as , 1" t d lh....... 1 'f: 1 1 .. mmc.a ec on _ e vrawmgs ana speCl.llea nerem. I B, EXTEND SERV!(~E from the point of service attacrune.nt, furnishing all orotective devices, starters, conductors, supports, raceways, pipe curbs, etc, to provide complete interior arId exterior electrical systcn1S to serve mc~t.or loadsj lighting lc,ads and I miscellaneous electrical I{Juds.. I 1.03 SERVICE: I .D... PERfvlANENT electrical servIce and metering will be supplied by the local utility 1>"'mn<>flV ;:;j "ollHap m' dkat"'d on n1f~ DrH\'Vm' a.;: \.,iU"~;"r U!.~~ -- l' ---0.... - \..i........ - - --- -" -0'-'"' 1.04 CODES: I .A. C01'viPL Y with the requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, and applicable rules and regulations oflocal and state laws and ordina..'1ces. I 1.05 SUBMITTALS: I .d.. SUBMIT a list of principal material items, g1Vmg manufacturers names and catalog numbers. Approval of the list shall be obtained from the Architect before orders are I placed~ Subnlit shop dra'?lings for .panelboardsa Subu.!it catal()g cut sheets of allligl1til1g fixtures. B. SUB1\1IT in accordance with Section 01340. I 1.06 BALLAST \V ARRANTY: I A. PROVIDE VlRITTffi..j" WARRANTY to the Owner stating that any ballast that becomes I r"'f ..........'"'T"r1o ,r., . I' tL.LA... lr'-.i\....ftL i 6000-1 defective within a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion shall be replaced atno cost to the Owner for labor or materials. B. WARRANTY MUST BE SIGNED by the General Contractor and Electrical Subcontractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. IN GENERAL, matetlals and appar-atus shall comply with applicable tests, ratings, specifications, and requirements of the IEEE and NEMA and shall bear the approved device label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 2.02 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES: A. UNLESS OTHERWISE indicated, branch circuit protective device enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1, general purpose type. Circuit protective devices installed outdoors or exposed to the weather shall have weatherproof enclosures, NEMA Type 3R or Type 4. 2.03 PA1"\TELBOfu1IDS: A. P M"'ELBOARDS shall be dead front safety type. The bus size, the number of branch circuits, their ampere rating and number of poles, etc., for each panel board is noted on the Drawings, Solderless lugs, or connectors shall be provided on mains, on the load side of each branch circuit, and on neutral bVIs. All busses shall be 98%conductivity copper, except main switchboards may have aluminum bus bars, if called for on the Drawings. Cabinets shall be fabricated of code gauge sheet steel and shall be galvanized orcadmium plated inside and out. Fronts shall be sheet steel with a grey paint finish over a rust Lllbibitive primer. Doorsshall be hinged a.'ld shall be equipped wiLlI suitable latches. B. P At'ffiLBOARDS shall be connected in a manner to equally distribute phase loads, with circuit ntLrnbering as indicated on the Drawings. Panel boards shall have a typewritten circuit directory card mounted in a frame V'o'ith plastic cover mounted on the h!Sidc of the door. c. P M~ELBOiLWS which have branches that will serve as normal switcbing means for .. h' "1 · 'd' L' .. " l' 11 1 .,1. h' h area ng_ tmg snaL De equlppe wItn na.Tlme prOtective c.eVlCes on a Dre<u<.ers W_.-lC serve lighting circuits with local switches, receptacles, appliances, water coolers, and . '1 l' l' 1 1 ' - 1 , I" ' f 'h . h SlmLar non-ngntmg ..oaas to prevent maavenenl InterruptIon 0 t .ese servIces "Len switching lighting, Handle protective devices shall be the non-padlocking type . 11 l' d r ,1' d -h 11 1 . bI r 1 ' 1 espeCla_.lyaeslgFle( lor tms use an s..al! De sUlta Y lastenea m pmce. D. CL~CUIT BRE,AJ(PRS for panel boards shall be molded plastic case tyP'~, Breakers shall have thermal-magnetic trio units and multi-Dole breakers shall have a common Lr1D ., . ELEC.TP~CAL 16000.2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I unit so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip all poles of each breaker. Breakers shall be trip-free and trip-indicating and shall have quick-make, quick-break contacts. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by General Electric, I.T.E., Square D or Westinghouse. E. LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS: General Electric, IT.E., Square D or Westinghouse. 2.04 SAFETY SWITCHES: A. SAFETY SWITCHES shall be general-duty type, NEMA Type "GD". Switch mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break. Cover shall be interlocked with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in the "OFF" position. Enclosures shall be "bonderized" or equal, and primed and finished to resist rusting and corrosion. Switches shall be General Electric, I.T.E., or Westinghouse. 2.05 FUSES: A. FUSES for safety switches shall be standard National Electrical Code cartridge type, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish and install proper size fuses where required for all fusible equipment. Provide dual element fuses for all motors. 2.06 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS: A. RIGID CONDillT: Hot dip galvanized, inside and out and on the threads. Prior to galvanizing, surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared for zinc coating. Surplus zinc adhering to the threads shall be removed, after which conduit shall be dipped in a chromic acid or clear enamel lacquer bath, and then baked. Furnish in 10 foot lengths, with one made up coupling per length, Standard Taper Pipe threads on each end. B. EMT: Galvanized, electrical metallic tubing, furnishing in 10 foot lengths, marked and conforming in all respects to UL and NEMA standards. C. FLEXIBLE 1vffiTALLIC RACEWAY: Use Sealtite liquid tight flexible metallic raceway for all connections to rotating or vibrating equipment, in lengths not to exceed 6 feet. D. PVC: Use EPC-40 polyvinyl chloride raceway for all encased work, under-ground work or work under slabs on grade. Raceways shall be furnished in 10 foot lengths and shall conform to all applicable UL and NEMA Standards. Turn through slab with rigid steel. Pull additional bond wire ifPVC is used. 2.07 BOXES: A. CEILING outlet boxes shall be 4-11/16" square, 2-1/8" deep for exposed work or furred ceiling work, and 3 inches deep for concrete work. All boxes for concrete work shall ELECTRICAL 16000-3 be of the type especially designed for this construction. Plaster rings and/or fixture studs shall he provided where required. B. FLUSH MOUNTED wall outlets shall be 4 inch square boxes or gang boxes, not less than 1-1/2 deep. Boxes shall be provided with extension rings and/or covers with sufficient depth to bring the covers flush with the finish walL C. BOXES for flush mOlmting in exposed concrete block or tile work with one or two devices shall have covers with square corners on the raised portion of the cover. The covers shall have a sufficient amount of depth to be flush with the face of the block or tile. Covers shall be Steel City 52-C series. Boxes for more than two devices shall be Steel City "GW" gang boxes. D. WALL PLATES for flush mounted wall boxes shall be 0.10 inch plastic of the "Uniline"design. Plates shall be non-conducting, non-combustible material in ivory color, Bryant 92000 series or equivalent. E. OUTLET BOXES for exposed wall mounting and outdoor installation shall be cast metal type "ES" or "FD" boxes with suitable galvanized sheet steel covers. F. FLOOR OUTLET BOXES shall be round, watertight cast metal type with fully adjustable tops. Floor plates shall finish flush with the finished floor surface. The exact location of boxes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Boxes shall be Steel City 600 series with aluminum floor plates or equivalent. Receptacle outlets shall be catalog No. SFH-40 with one duplex receptacle as specified in Paragraph B-6. Telephone outlets shall be catalog No. SFL-10. 2.08 CONDUCTORS: A. ALL CO~TIUCTORS shall be copper, shall conform to applicable ASTM specifications as to conductivity, and shall be free from kinks and defects when installed. Stranding shall be IPCEA Standard. Conductors No. 1 0 Awe and smaller shall be solid and all others stranded. 2.09 CONDUCTOR INSULA nONS: A. UNLESS otherwise indicated herein or on the Drawings, all branch circuit conducts shall have a moisture resistant thermoplastic insulation, Underwriters' Type THWN/THHN. B. FOR FEEDER and for conductors #8 A WG and larger, the conductors shall have a moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic insulation, Underwriters' Type THWN/THHN. C. FIXTURE WIRE shall be Type TlllIN, extended from fixture to fixture through the fixture channel, unless more stringent methods are required by local code or ordinance. ELECTRICAL 16000-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.10 WIRING DEVICES A. RECEPTACLES: All receptacles shall be 20 ampere, 125 volt, grounding type with ground connection made through an extra pole which shall be permanently connected to the raceway system. B. TUMBLER SWITCHES: Local tumbler switches shall be of the type as indicated on the Drawings, rated 20 amperes at 120 volts or 20 amperes at 277 volts, Underwriters' approved without de-rating for tungsten lamp loads or inductive loads. 2.11 LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. FURNISH COMPLETE in all respects all lighting fixtures indicated on the Drawings. Verify the ceiling fInishes and suspension systems for selection of the proper type trim and support arrangements of the fixtures. 2.12 BALLASTS: A. BALLASTS for fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start, high efficiency, Type 8, high power factor type and shall bear the CBM and UL labels. B. ALL BALLASTS shall be individually fused and shall be equipped with internal thermal protection. Fuses shall be installed on the line side of the ballasts and shall be sized to prevent overheating in event of lamp or ballast failure. 2.13 LAMPS: A. FLUORESCENT LAMPS shall be of one manufacture and shall be as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be high efficiency type.. B. INCANDESCENT LAMPS shall be 130 volt, general purpose type with brass base. C. LAMPS shall be manufactured by General Electric, Syvania or Westinghouse. 2.14 PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES: A. PROVIDE pipe curb assemblies or pipe seals specifIed in Section 07800, for all conduit penetrations through the roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES: A. UNLESS otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top of cabinet or enclosure 6'-6" above finished floor, properly aligned and adequately supported ELECTRICAL 16000-5 independently of the connecting raceways. All steel. shapes, etc., necessary for the support of the equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor where the building structure is not suitable for mounting the equipment directly thereon. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS A. RIGID CONDUIT: Cut all conduit square, ream smooth and thread properly to receive couplings or fittings. Fit all raceway ends at cabinets, panels, pull boxes, outlet boxes, fixtures, etc. with approved locknuts and bushings. Make up joints with white lead applied to the male threads only. On galvanized conduit which has been field cut and threaded, protect ends and threads with "ZRC" compound, applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. EMT: Cut all raceways square and ream smooth. Connect to couplings or fittings with indenter type connections, using not less than 3 indents per connection. Use proper adapter fittings at all boxes, panels, pull boxes, etc., together with approved bushings. C. PVC: Cut raceways square, deburr ends, and wipe clean of dust, dirt and plastic shavings. Wipe raceway end clean and dry, and apply a full, even coat of approved PVC cement, covering the area to be inserted in the socket. Firmly push raceway and fitting together, and rotate to distribute the cement evenly. Avoid cement build-up inside raceway. Wipe joint to remove excess cement and let dry at room temperature. Provide socketmale adapter fittings at all boxes, pull boxes, panels, etc., together with approved bushings. D. CONCEAL all raceways, except as specifically indicated on the Drawings. Run exposed raceways, where permitted, parallel and perpendicular to the building lines and to each other. Offset raceways where entering boxes or outlets and run flat against surfaces. E. DURING CONSTRUCTION, cap all open conduit ends, using T & B #1460 Series capped bushings. Seal all underground raceways to exclude moisture. Cap all empty raceways that do not terminate in a covered box, cabinet, or similar enclosure. Route raceways to avoid trapped runs, or make provision to drain moisture by installing approved drains or breathers. Install seals on raceways entering air conditioning plenum chambers. F. COAT ALL UNDERGROUND steel raceways with Koppers #50 Bitumastic before backfilling. Apply direct from the container without dilution. G. INSTALL approved expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints. H. FURNISH ALL CONDUIT stub-ups into panels, boxes, equipment housings, equipment bases and lighting standards with insulating grounding type bushings, Steel City Type GB. Furnish Steel City Type Bi bushings for all other conduit terminations. ELECTRICAL 16000-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. INSTALL #12 A WG galvanized pull-wire in all empty raceways. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES: A. SYMBOLS on Drawings are approximate locations only. The Architect reserves the right to make minor changes in location prior to roughing, without extra cost to the Owner. Properly center outlets with respect to the architectural feature of the buildings. Locate outlet boxes for switches at the lock side of doors. B. SET ALL BOXES securely in position, mounted so that covers or plates will mount flush with the fInished construction. Furnish and install extension or plaster rings where required, and to avoid additional raceway offsets. C. SAW CUT OPENIN.GS in concrete block or masonry walls with an opening tolerance of 1/8" on all sides, with the bottom of the opening at the masonry joint nearest to the dimensions indicated. D. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY indicated otherwise, mount all outlets at the following heights above finished floor, measured to the center of the box: 1. Switches A8". 2. Receptacles .12". 3. Bracket Lights 90". 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS: A. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, all branch circuit conducts shall be No. 12 AWG. Any branch circuit run over 100 feet in length of the circuit to the panel, shall be No. 10 A WG to the first outlet. B. SPLICES, taps and attachment fittings and lugs shall be electrically and mechanically secure and solderless lugs and connectors shall be used. Lugs shall be used for conductors sizes No.8 A WG and larger. Provide sufficient slack cable in boxes, outlets and cabinets to ensure that there is no binding at the bushings. All lugs shall be of the correct sizes for the conductors joined and in no case shall strands be cut from a conductor in order to fit the conductor into a lug. Taping of joints shall be with vinyl plastic electrical tape to secure insulation strength equal to that of the conductors joined. C. ALL CONDUCTORS shall be color coded as required by the NEC and further identified and coded as specifIed hereinafter. Color coding shall be by means of colored insulating material, colored braid of jacket over the insulation or means of suitable colored, permanent non-aging, insulating tape applied to conductors at each outlet, cabinet or junction point The color coding shall be accomplished as the conductors are installed. The following system of color coding shall be strictly adhered to: (1) Ground leads, green; (2) grounding neutral leads, white; (3) ungrounded phase wire, black, red, and blue. The color code assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed throughom. . ELECTRICAL 16000-7 3.05 GROUNDING: A. THE INTERIOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS shall be completely and effectively grounded as required by the NEC and as specified hereinafter. Only a direct connection with copper wire to either or both of the following will be considered as a "direct" ground: 1. A I-inch or larger mechanically and electrically continuous, underground, iron or steel cold water line. 2. Two 5/8" diameter, copper weld rod 10 feet long, driven vertically into the ground. All ground connections, where buried or otherwise inaccessible, shall be brazed or welded. B. ALL MET ALLIC RACEWAYS shall be mechanically and electrically secure at all joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings, and equipment. Metallic raceways shall be connected to a direct ground at the point of electrical service entrance and shall be electrically continuous throughout the entire system. C. EQUIPMENT CONNECTED to the conduit system by a section of flexible conduit shall have a full size, but not larger than No. 3/0, grounding shunt installed as described in Paragraph 3.07.C. D. A NO.6 ground lead, connected to a direct ground, shall be terminated in the telephone cabinet. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. ALL FIXTURES shall be properly and carefully supported and aligned. Furnish and install all necessary steel shapes, etc., for support of fixtures as required and/or detailed on the Drawings. Lighting fixtures shall be clean and lamped with new lamps at the time of final inspection, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. All fixtures in plaster ceilings shall be installed with a plaster frame. Unless otherwise noted, mounting height for fixtures are from the fmished floor to the bottom of the fixture for pendant mounted fixtures, and to the bottom of the outlet box or recessed back box for wall mounted fixtures. 3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. ALL EQUIPMENT shown on the Drawings which is furnished under other sections of these Specifications and by others shall be connected under this section. This equipment shall be considered as being furnished in place. B. BEFORE CONNECTING any piece of equipment, check the name plate data against the information shown on the Drawings and call to the attention of the Architect any discrepancies thereto. c. THE EQUIPMENT shall be connected to the conduit system by means of a short ELECTRICAL 16000-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I section (18" minimum of flexible conduit unless otherwise indicated. Connections with conductors. No. 6 and smaller, the grounding conductor shall be installed inside the flexible section. The connection on the line side of the flexible section shall be made by pulling in the ground conductor back to the nearest box, with necessary increase in conduit size for the extra conductor, and terminating the conductor with an approved grounding type bushing in the box. An alternate method may be by installing a "c" conduit between the conduit and the flexible section and terminating the ground conductor therein by means of a solderless lug bolted to the side wall of the conduit,. Connections with conductors of No. 4 and larger, the ground conductor shall be installed on the outside of the flexible section making the connection to the conduit with an approved grounding clamp. 3.08 CONTROL DEVICES AND CONTROL WIRING: A. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, all control devices (except motor starters) such as thermostats, firestats, relays, etc., shall be furnished under other sections of the Specifications, and shall be wired complete under this Section. The intent of the diagrams on the Drawings is to show the control devices and the extent of the control circuiting required, and these diagrams shall not be used on the job. All control circuitLng shall be installed in accordance with diagrams furnished by the manufacturers of the control equipment and which have been approved by the Architect. All controls shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor. 3.09 CONDUIT ROOF PENETRATIONS: A. MAKE CONDUIT roof penetrations only through pipe curb assemblies or pipe seals. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT: A. IDENTIFICATION shall be provided for all electrical equipment installed by the Contractor. Identification shall clearly describe the equipment function. Method of identification and description shall be subject to approval of the Architect. B. PANEL BOARD DIRECTORY cards shall be completed with a typewriter to indicate areas and/or devices served by each circuit. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL 16000-9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS; A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM complete in all respects with the requirements of the Insurance Underwriters and local Fire Marshall and or other designated authorities. B. WORK INCLUDES furnishing materials, equipment; labor, and services as required to install complete fire alarm system( s) as specified or indicated. System shall be complete operable installation as required even though every minor component may not be indicated or specified. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. SYSTEM shall be anopen circuit, non-coded, supervised type system with battery back- up and charger as manufactured by Simplex, Gamewell, or Notifier. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES: A. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A Active Zones, Simplex #4002-9101. B. HORN _Simplex #2901-9806 WB-l. C. VISUAL ALARM .Simplex #2904 .9003. D. HEAT DETECTOR .Simplex 2098.9464. E. MANUAL STATION .simplex #2099 .9201. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16720-1 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 THE SYSTEM shall be installed in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code and N.F.P.A. #72C. 3.02 A COMPLETE set of point-to-point wiring drawings will be provided with shop drawings. 3.03 ALL WIRING shall be installed in conduit and shall be #16 A WG minimum. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16720-2 I I - - I ~ - I - I I I I I I I I I I oJ ",,1 BOND NUMBER: 98 NX 35.&6 3 ,. CONTRACT BOND STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINELLAS KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we OAKHURST CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. as Contractor and STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is 1 STATE FARl\1 PLAZ,\, BLOOMINGTON, ILLINOIS 61701. HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hcreinatter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: SIX HUNDRED SEVENTY THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED SEVENTY THREE DOLLARS AND FIFTEEN CENTS ($670,873.15) (TOTAL INCLUDES BASE BID, ALTERNATES I, 6, 7 AND 5 'Yo CONTINGENCY) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the t~lithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the IS<V-- day of 1--~ ,2008, entered into bctween the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: ) CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION PROJECT NUMBER: 07-0044-PR a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein, NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement t()r Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereoC and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specitications as therein provided t()I', and shall indemnity and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent inti-ingements on the part of the said Contractor ~Igents or employees, in the execution or pert(mllanee of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any di fference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay tor the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, &. any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on accollnt of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY RECREATION CONTRACT.Joe Page I - CONTRACT BOND . (2) " .~ . .. . .# And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and tully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper perfonnance of the said work by thc Contractor or his agents or scrvants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason ofthc usc ol'any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselvcs, thcir successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor matcrial furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be pcrformed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it docs hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this 8TH day of FEBRUARY , 2008. 2I<:ST: I. {~/1{ / I.J.'\.~ .',~..~ .\ -"'I I ./\ J ) }f.~ f ~J;/Jf >f /0 ~. ~ STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY SURETY By: SU/!cu-t 'vi. Wayq-v-e., ATTORN EY -IN-FACT WITNESS: COUNTERSIGNED: C-tJAA h. ~~ .Lu'1en.1P"J ~I'<'ldfPyJi. I1tnt . Power of Attorney STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, an Illinois corporation, with its principal office in Bloomington, Illinois, does hereby constitute and appoint: Eugina Brant, Christine Cameron, Ceola Campbell, Pamela Chancellor, Julie Fehrman, Mark Fink, Julie Freed, Matthew J. Gibbons, John Gibson, Jay W. Hendren, John R. Horton, Cynthia Johnson, Susan K. Johnson, Amanda Kaufman, Julia Klinzing, Connie S. Knox, G.F. Krawcyk, Christine Macdonnell, Lori McDowell, Melissa L. Morris, Donna K. O'Crowly, Amy C. Ogan, James Platt, Vicki Redman, Leann Rees, Linda Rieck, Suzanne M. Robertson, Rebecca F. Robison, Lucinda K. Samford, Alice Schuler, Mary Sieg, Mary A. Spotts, Heidi Stevens, Sara L. Tackett, Perry Tracy, Justin Veach, Susan M. Wagoner, Karen Weber, of Bloomington, Illinois its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for, and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds, undertakings or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond as follows: Any such obligation in any amount This appointment is made under and by the authority of a resolution which was passed by the Executive Committee of the Board of Directors of State Farm Fire and Casualty Company on the 24th day of July, 1974, as is duly authorized by the Board of Directors in Article II, Section 6 of the By-Laws of the Company, which resolution is: Resolved, that the Executive Vice-President or a Vice-President of the Company is hereby authorized to appoint and empower any representative of the Company or other person or persons as Attorney-in-Fact to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, policies, contracts of indemnity or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, which the Company might execute through its duly elected officers, and affix the seal of the Company thereto. Any said execution of such documents by an Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the Company. Any Attorney-in-Fact, so appointed, may be removed for good cause and the authority so granted may be revoked as specified in the Power of Attorney. Resolved, that the signature of the Executive Vice-President or any Vice-President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted, and the signature of the Secretary, Vice-President or Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power and any such power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding on the Company. IN WITNESS THEREOF, STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be signed by its Vice- President, and its Corporate Seal to be affixed this 21st. day of June, 2007. This APPOINTMENT SHALL CEASE AND TERMINATE AUTOMATICALLY AS OF DECEMBER 31,2010, UNLESS SOONER REVOKED AS PROVIDED. STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF McLEAN On this 21st. day of June 2007, before me personally came William K. King to me known, who being duly sworn, did e and say that he is Vice-President of STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such Corporate Seal; and that he executed said instrument on behalf of the corporation by authority of his office under the By-Laws of said corporation. ~Itt~ .,::-..............,....,""\\\\\\\ -ff- ~t. ~.D C-4Sif. III /,I'~~.,......... ..~(....~I\, f :/ c.o,,"O"-4,..,. \_~ '~ / ..... ; ..... : J! /)- ~ ~'" SEAlk:;: J \/ ~""" ......~'T.f 111111(1".,~~~~~, ~\.\.,..~== \\\\\\\"',.....:...............-- STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY By: OFFICIAL SEAL CHRISTINE M CHENOWETH NOTARY PUBLIC - STATE Of ILLINOIS MY COMMISSION EXPiReS APR. 20.2011 Notary Public My commission expires April 20, 2011 CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Vice-President of STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a true and correct copy, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked and the resolutions as set forth are now in force. Signed and sealed at Bloomington, Illinois. Dated this 8TH day of FEBRUARY 2008 _..::-........................""'\\\\\\\ ff.:~...~~. ~~~ .~~~(J.. 11111/ I~:" ....~;o,A. \ f:/ (,0,,'0"...,..,. .....s ~ ~ ~: ;~ ~ ~ ....... SEAlk /.: j \'II~~~""""""'~~~~ ./ Ill\\\~"CTO.. \\.-:"__..:';- \\\"""........ ~ ,. Vice-Pres' n If you have a question concerning the validity of this Power of Attorney, call (309) 766-2090. FB6-9043.39A (12/21/07) Printed in U.S.A. . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I BOND NUMBER: q~ I)/~ ():l)cLP ~ CONTRACT BOND STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINELLAS KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we OAKHURST CONSTRUCTION COMPANY. INC. as Contractor and STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is 1 STATE FARM PLAZA. BLOOMINGTON. ILLINOIS 61701. HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: SIX HUNDRED SEVENTY THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED SEVENTY THREE DOLLARS AND FIFTEEN CENTS ($670,873.15) (TOT AL INCLUDES BASE BID, ALTERNATES 1, 6, 7 AND 5% CONTINGENCY) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of , 2008, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION PROJECT NUMBER: 07-0044-PR a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the tenns and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY RECREATION CONTRACT.doc Page] . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of , 2008. OAKHURST CONSTRUCTION CO.. INC. CONTRACTOR By: ATTEST: SURETY WITNESS: By: ATTORNEY-IN-FACT COUNTERSIGNED: - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT ~ This CONTRACT made and entered into this 15- day of , 2008 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter de ignated as the "City", and OAKHURST CONSTRUCTION CO.. INC. of the City of SEMIN LE County of PINELLAS and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY AND RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION (07-0044-PR) FOR THE SUM OF: SIX HUNDRED SEVENTY THOUSAND. EIGHT HUNDRED SEVENTY THREE DOLLARS AND FIFTEEN CENTS ($ 670.873.15) (TOTAL INCLUDES BASE BID. ALTERNATES 1.6.7 AND 5% CONTINGENCY). In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be perfonned by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perfonn in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY RECREATION CONTRACT.doc Pugc 3 ---- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1.000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto tor the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or it: for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: f2~;3-,~-:rr: William B. Home, II City Manager Countersigned: BY:~~ Hibbard, , Mayor-Councilmember (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Attest: (~~tL, .Q~. C hia2J Goudeau, Cit~eferl) / V ,Approved as 0 fI Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney O;rJ\hUf6i:. &J'1ot ~ ~ (;,)e J ;Jres (Co or) By: . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORATION FORM) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINELLAS On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned administer oaths and take acknowledgments, deposes and says: authority, duly authorized to , who after being duly sworn, That he is the CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. located at (TITLE) of OAKHURST , a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of , ~ with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION PROJECT NUMBER: 07-0044-PR That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me Oakhurst Construction Company, Inc. AFFIANT This _ day of , 200 . BY: NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY RECREATION CONTRACT.doc Page 6 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I I I I I PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a oertified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the 1.ID.dersigned, OAKHURST CONSTCO INC asPrindpal, and STATE FARM FIRE AND CAS UAL TY COMPANY as Suretyt are held and finnly bovnd unto tho City of Clearwater, FIori~inthesmnof TEN PERCENT (lO%J OF BID AL'10UNT DolIars($ ------ ) (being a minimum of lOUAt of Contractor's total bid amount) fur the payment of whi~ well and tmly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind o'UISelves, our heirs, executolS, adminiRtrators, successors and assigns. The condition olthe above obligation is such that if the atta<:hed Proposal of OAKHURST CONST CO INC as Principal" and STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPA!1iS Surety, for work specified as: LIBRARY AND RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION PROJECT NO. 07-0044-PR all as stipulated in said F.I'OpQsal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in acconlance with the plans and specifications provided herefor" till within Pinellas Couoty, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said awan:I eDta into a wntnwt, in writit1g, and ~ the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Managet-, 1his obligation shall be voi~ otherwise the Same shall be full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the.. City ~ ed or liquidated damages. Signed this~4TH dayof DECEMBER .20 07 . (Principal must indicate whether cozpomtion, partnership.. company or individual) OAAhUY"St:- c1n~t Co Principal The penon signing shaJ1, in his own handwriting. sign the Principal's nam:~ his own Dame and his title; .the person signing for a COIpomion must" by affidavit., show his authority to bind the corporation. By: Sc-.I.4&U{ 1"1. t<...Jq/C~l TItle ATTORNEY IN FACT SUSAN M. WAGONER 'J . tl a.. /1 L (ti~ y. L t2~.,---" . ,Ll .e-~y1 ~ I..l? S. ~ J1 e STATE FARM FIRE A~D CASUALTY COMPANY Surety Section V Conlr:itct Bond ~d gjd FOm'l Page 7 JU;vjsed: SIJ 112005 -. I Power of Attorney STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY I KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, an Illinois corporation, with its principal office in Bloomington, Illinois, does hereby constitute and appoint: Eugina Brant, Christine Cameron, Ceola Campbell, Pamela Chancellor, Christine ~. Chenoweth, Julie Fehrman, Mark Fink, Julie Freed, Matthew J. Gibbons, John Gibson, John R. Horton, Cynthia Johnson, Susan K. Johnson, Amanda Kaufman, Julia I Klinzing, Connie S. Knox, G.F. Krawcyk, Christine Macdonnell, Lori McDowell, Melissa L. Morris, Donna K. O'Crawly, Amy C. Ogan, James Platt, Vicki Redman, Leann Rees, Linda Rieck, Suzanne M. Robertson, Rebecca F. Robison, Lucinda K. Samford, Alice Schuler, Mary Sieg, Mary A. Spotts, Heidi Stevens, Cindy R. Swick, Sara L. Tackett, Perry Tracy, Susan M Wagoner, Karen Weber, of Bloomington, Illinois its true and lawful Attorney( s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for, and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds, undertakings or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond as I follows: Any such obligation in any amount This appointment is made under and by the authority of a resolution which was passed by the Executive Committee of the Board of I Directors of State Farm Fire and Casualty Company on the 24th day of July, 1974, as is duly authorized by the Board of Directors in Article II, Section 6 of the By-Laws of the Company, which resolution is: Resolved, that the Executive Vice-President or a VicecPresTdem-oHhe Company is hereby authorized to appoint and empower any representative of the Company or other person or persons as Attorney-in-Fact to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, I undertakings, policies, contracts of indemnity or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, which the Company might execute through its duly elected officers, and affix the seal of the Company thereto. Any said execution of such documents by an Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the Company. Any Attorney-in-Fact, so appointed, may be removed for good cause and the authority so granted may be revoked as specified in the Power of IAttorney. Resolved, that the signature of the Executive Vice-President or any Vice-President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted, and the signature of the Secretary, Vice-President or Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power and any such power or certificate bearing such facsimile ISignature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding on the Company. IN WITNESS THEREOF, STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be signed by its Vice- [resident, and its Corporate Seal to be affixed this 21st. day of June, 2007. This APPOINTMENT SHALL CEASE AND TERMINATE AUTOMATICALLY AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2010, UNLESS SOONER REVOKED AS PROVIDED. ITATE OF ILLINOIS OUNTY OF McLEAN On this 21st. day of June 2007, before me personally came William K. King to me known, who being duly sworn, did e and say "at he is Vice-President of STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above .strument; tf1at he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such Corporate Seal; and that he executed Isaid instrument on behalf of the corporation by authority of his office under the BY-Laws;;:said ~:~orati~ I'~... __ ._..,1 11 OFFICIAL SEAL ~ "f fJ~ CHRISTINE M CHENOWETH NOTARY PUBlIC - STATE Of IllINOIS MY CC>>.t.l1SS1ON EXPiReS APR. 2O.20n -.;,:................................""\\\\\\ ;.:~,#fot.. ~~~ .~~.r"..l\l,', (l<~~.:~~~.~S~\ ~ ;':. SEAlk /: J \,.ll~~~.............~~~~ :; Ill\\\~~~:~~,~~':.~__~::- STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY I By: I CERTIFICATE Notary Public My commission expires April 20, 2011 I, the undersigned Vice-President of STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the original Power of Ittorney of Which the foregoing is a true and correct copy, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked and the resolutions as set rth are now in force. igned and sealed at Bloomington, Illinois. Dated this ~ day of ~~ .~. I ,;:-..............................,"\\\\\\\ ;_~~..t.. ~.~~ .~~.rlf.., 1\1'1 ?-t-+.... .....""...\ i ~:: (.0"'0"'..,.# \. S ~~ ~Si ..u. :!~ " .... SEAJJ:'*' f \",:'~~....... ..~~~..:; II\\\,""'TI.. \\.\,.: ...._"::': \\\"",.................- ~~~ I Iou have a question concerning the validity of this Power of Attorney, call (309) 766.2090. 6.9043A.38 /07) Printed in U.S.A. I . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF MCLEAN I, HEIDI J. STEVENS, in and for said county in the state aforesaid, do hereby certify that SUSAN M. WAGONER , Attorney-in-fact of State Farm Fire and Casualty Company of Bloomington, '"inois, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Illinois, personally known to me to be the same person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument as Attorney-in-fact of State Farm Fire and Casualty Company, appeared before me this day in person and acknowledged that he signed and delivered the said instrument as his and State Farm Fire and Casualty Company's free and voluntary act for the uses and purposes therein set forth. Given under my hand and official seal this 4TH day of DECEMBER, 2007. My Commission expires: MARCH 12, 2009 ~~.~ HEIDI J. STEVENS otary Public OFHCI", L:',':.'. H~iD! ,I :.:::n:::',/.;--:.:,I~'" t,OTJlRY PUE< !'-, ' ',Tc""'-' ',0"" " " " ~Fl CO"l:"I,'.(:;;)I]J':' ~~':~. !" .': .:!p.n '~~:', ').:- :'--1 '_.' _ ,~_, _ ~ -".,. ...._c._..r-._.~ .~r .~-",' .",~"._..~.".-",~,.,..."., -., ~ . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: CLEARWATER BEACH LmRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR EST. UNIT ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION A. Phase 1 - All items included in the base bid: 1. Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center Consolidation including, clearing and grubbing, interior and exterior demolition, renovations and new building construction including electrical and mechanical, plumbing, millwork, all interior/exterior finishes, roofing, all site civil; underground utilities, concrete slabs, asphalt, as necessary within limits of work and all restoration of construction limits of to bring limits of work area to original condition at site hand over. Base bid shall include all work required in the contract drawings and specifications prepared by Fowler Associates Architects Inc. & Deuel & Associates including but not limited to the following: during the period between January 21, 2008 to February 27,2008 the first order of construction items listed below must be completed within the allotted time: · Demolition & completion of Women's Restroom · Demolition & Completion of Companion Restroom & Vending area. · Demolition & completion of StoragelKitchen Area (note Storage No.3 does not need to be completed in this time period). · Demolition of wall and completion of storage door in Social Hall including 4 plex electrical outlets in each of the comers see drawing E-l.3 Power Plan and Notes. · Demolition of Storage Room into Hallway No.2 · Demolition of Game Room and Art & Craft Rooms & installation oftemporary wall between Lobby Area and Proposed Library storefront and Hallway No. 1. and all other base bid items for Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center Consolidation UNIT OTY. Lump Sum 2. TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY* (10% CONTINGENCY OF THE SUB TOTAL OF ITEM I) SectionV Bid Fonn addendum no 4 14 TOTAL PRICE $jLjg 1/0_), I $ S1. '140. J-o / Revised: 5/11/2006 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROJECT: CLEARWATER BEACH LffiRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION EST. UNIT UNIT QTY. TOTAL PRICE *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approval by the Owner or the owner's representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not indicated in item 1 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of his contract shall be returned to the owner by final change order during close out ofthe contract.) 3. Phase I - GRAND TOTAL - ITEMS 1 an,d 2 INCLUDES 10% CONTINENCY S/",C')l{ 3 c/3 ? Con!Ji. CONTRACTOR: Of}l~hu(s-t ) It.. e.... {b BIDDER'S PHASE I - GRAND TOTAL ITEM 3 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT CONTINENCY S toc1 ,~ 4 3. ,3 (J I (Numbers) BIDDER'S PHASE I - GRAND TOTAL ITEMS 3 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY S,-)LX . fh.'11 die' c:l I-Inllrl{(7c1 =/nf -n.1 Jhr('r'~ ~""I c) ( 7/1 i) \J 5 0- n d - :30);00 ---r / hrr:-e- (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON IDS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. TIDS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SectionV Bid Form addendum no 4 15 Revised: 5/11/2006 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROJECT: CLEARWATER BEACH LmRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION IMPORT ANT NOTE Due to the fact that this facility has been previously booked for rentals, all add alternates must be done within a specific time frame different than Phase I. All alternates must be completed between December 8, 2008 and February 15,2009. B. Phase II - Add Alternates: 1. Alternate No. 1 - Social Hall demolish existing store front one east and south elevation of social hall and replace with new glazing, framing and bulkhead as indicated on drawing sheets A-2.1 alternate #1 South Elevation & A-2.2 alternate # 1 East Elevation, include flood proofing 72 inches above finish floor elevation of social hall L.S. EST. UNIT UNIT QTY. TOTAL PRICE 1 $!p/:.} 00 O. - , 2. Alternate No.2 - Social Hall remove and replace existing fluorescent light fixtures and add incandescent recessed down light fixture as indicated on drawing sheets A-I.3, E-1.1 & E-1.2 and all electrical work to make lighting system in social hall operational, existing ceiling grid & tiles to remain. L.S. 1 $/&,000.- 3. Alternate No.3. - Remove existing vinyl base cove floor tile, patch, level grind existing floor to a smooth finish prior to replacing with new 24"x24"xl/1O" quartz tile of the social hall, lobby area and hall adjacent to vending and restrooms including installing new 4" base cove, waxing & polishing floor. Contractor to provide tile & colors samples to the Owner for selection. L.S. 1 $)Q,60o. 4. Alternate No.4 - a. Provide two-roof hatch above air condition mezzanine rooms for social hall 1 $ LJ 000 - I L.S. b. Provide roof hatch above air condition mezzanine room above restroom area L.S. 1 $~.000 .-- , 5. Alternate No.5 - Existing south wooden louver remove all deteriorated wood and replace with all new material and pre fabricated aluminum louver see section detail on sheet A-3.2 L.S. 1 $ ~ CctJ ." , Section V Bid Form addendum no 4 16 Revised: 5/1 1/2006 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROJECT: CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR ITEM EST. NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT 6. Alternate No.6 - replace air conditioning system in the proposed library renovations, lobby area, restrooms, reception desk and office as shown on drawing sheets M-la & M-2a. (note dwgs. will be in addendum no. 1) L.S. UNIT OTY. TOTAL PRICE 1 $J J) 000 , - 7. Alternate No.7 - Add millwork in library room, floor plan and elevation details are included in Addendum No 4 L. S. 1 $ q.OOO .- $ ~ Itf& 006 - I 8. Sub Total of Add Alternates 1,2,3,4,5,6, & 7 9. TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY* (10% CONTINGENCY OF THE SUB TOTAL OF ITEM 8) $ jJ}, Iflcc, , -- I *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approval by the Owner or the owner's representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not indicated in item 1 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of his contract shall be returned to the owner by final change order during close out of the contract.) 10. Phase n - GRAND TOTAL - AL TERNA TE ITEMS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7 and ITEM 9 (10% CONTINENCY) sl:iJ /to. &00.- , CONTRACTOR: <Do..-r; h u t:5-t t rM!.. ~ (' 1>Y1/) 4:- BIDDER'S PHASE n ALTERNATES - GRAND TOTAL - LINE 9 (which includes alternate items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7and 9 - Ten (10%) contingency) S / ~ ~OO . 00 BIDDER'S PHASE n ALTERNATES - GRAND TOTAL ITEMS 10 WHICH INCLUDES (Numbers) TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY S Un e HUrl d ,- e c-l :S J X' }-{indred _<),x ~7 .-;-: I/101J ~ a T~ d (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS IDS TOTAL BID BASED ON IDS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. TillS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SectionV Bid Form addendum no 4 17 Revised: 5/11/2006 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROJECT: CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR . ~ A. LINE 3 - PHASE I TOTAL OF BASE BID INCLUDING 10% CONTINGENCY $ I(,[~ 3 LJ j . (NUMBERS , . B. LINE 10 - PHASE n TOTAL OF ALTERNATE ITEMS INCLUDING 10 % CONTINGNECY S J~O. &,06.'- (NUMBERS) I ~ C. GRAND TOTAL OF PROJECT S 7&4/ q 4:3 .. (NUMBERS) SectionV Bid Form addendum no 4 18 Revised: 5/11/2006 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF F~A ) COUNTY OF h'Yle....\ la 5 ) ~u~Ovn ~r~eJo being duly sworn, deposes and says that he~ is Secretaryof~ho('~-t ('1)n~i: t!-.o JY\~ a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue ofthe laws ofthe State of Florida, and having its principal office at: ~ '14 q, ) 36 ~t Do &rn i Y1 d lJ.l I n e I \0 s '1--\ ~:3 J I f.p Street & Number City , County State Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of Oo...~ hur.")-t. C.Oy') ",=,\.}M.)c....'-t10 n c!.o J n c- (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that ~de.nn Thic~anQelo is 9,e-6ldef\-t (Officer's Name) ) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for CJL0 ~t'..h L bt"'o-f""l1 Q.. (2.e.c.. ~U- for said corporation by virtue of '104 )cu.J,.) ~ (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of the Board of Directors. Ifby Resolution give date of adoption). ~-UJcl'I1.. aIcM~~plo ~ U~Cl.4"'\" Affiant 'j.-t Lhrl. O--f"' ~ el 0 Sworn to before me thi~ 0 day of ." 04t..I 0'e1 ,2007 I MEltS SA J. HEEREN Notary Public, Slale of Flonda My Comm. Expires Oct. 22. 2010 No.006()7452 s>t'ary Public JJe (;S5t'\ T ~eerCh Type/print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any SectionY Contract Bond and Bid Fonn Page 8 Revised: 5/1 112006 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY O;J?~el }a~ ) G, ) e-r1 (\ ----:Do..t"" L.a.,,', ~J 0 being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is ~t' e f:1} deA"\ -t of ~ h U('S -t ~")-t. . en. I () ~. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. ~'_'-U' . "..../ \ , /.. ,_ (__ 2 ; .' /It:7_. 'f1^ Sworn to and subscribed before me this at) day of ~ len f'\ Affiant ~1)o.rc.ao-r->~el ~ f . rktk4 ',2eD7 - -" .J. HEEh.... -'" at Flonoa 22. 2010 MELISSA J. HEEREN NOlary Public. State ot Florida My Comm. Expires Oct. 22. 2010 No. 00607452 Section V Contract Bond and Bid Form Page 9 Revised: 5/11/2006 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR Drawings Prepared by Fowler Associates Architects, Inc. Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: SectionV Contract Bond and Bid Fonn Page 10 Revised: 5/11/2006 B€r1Y'\ lJaj....c..aJ..~e...lo- I - ~. SU~,,~_~~IO I I I I I I . I I I I I I I I I I I ~e~. PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a b~d or certified check on .3-t.A--t e.... r~t"'yY\ CY ~voJ~ bld A-m-t ) }::' I re. Bank, for the sum of I d1 0 0+ ($ (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows.: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enriclunent, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: 1'-lq. l~~ ~()")) n alP -1J 5-l k)o 'I4Q, '::J- i In6 6L 190 Signature of Bidder: Iet"\ ("\ 1Jo."~Q./) ~ -e 10 (The bidder must indicate whether~~oration.1Partnership, Company or Individual). SectionV Contract Bond and Bid Form Page 11 Revised: 5/1 1/2006 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, sh his authority, to bind the corporation. By: G1 (l Business Address of Bidder: City and State: So r'Y) U'1 0 Lt 1~5 Title: Q.e~ l de n t- bi po ~ Zip Code 3.3.. -r, Lp Datedat~(Y)'n(')\? ~'T'\ c..o ,this d \ dayofUCe,mb..e( I SectionV Contract Bond and Bid Form Page 12 , A.D., 20 01 Revised: 5/11/2006 . I I I I I .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: CLEARWATER BEACH LmRARY & RECREATION CENTER CONSOLIDATION Project Number: 07-00044-PR Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. L Date: y)('!V. / 0, ~CjJ '1 AddendumNo.LDate:i)nv J7J dOG, Addendum No. 3.-Date: nee. 6, d260"1 Addendum No. ~ Date:Th (I.... Addendum No. ~ Date'::DtC. I,J.. 0200 ~ } ILl ~1 f Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Co (f\-C .../ (Signature of Officer) Pc ~S lde.f\-t. (Title of Officer) ~. c... .:-J.I, '2.0 0, (Date) SectionV Contract Bond and Bid Fonn Page 13 Revised: 5/11/2006 ----- I"'rgm. ....'1an4i a;:.8n~n I.>.J; rr.oger Doucnaro ,"i;UranQ~. Ir~. ~a.-":IL.': 10; :"'\.1"-'-1 1......n;arfgiiIQ - . 1oJ0il11lf; -~Gl~lJ.- ,aT~~r ~ . --~~-~E IMIN['\ONYYY. OAKHU~2/08/08 PRv~'UCER ----T- THIS ctRTlFICATE 15 ISSUED AS A MATTER Of INfORMATION I!ouch.;:u'd-Clearwa teL" ONLY AND CONFiiRS Nu RIGHTS UPON THIi CIiRTIFICATIi 101. oS L.....'..:....... L l:o....i.v.. ' HOl,Orm, THI3 CERTII'ICATE OOE3 tlOT AMEND, EII.TE/oID OF! P 0 Sox 60510 L ALTER THE COVERAGE AfFORDED BY THE POLICIES 6ELOW. Clearwater FL 33iSB-6090 i i I ' I~~-=-~_: 222 -44 7 -6 4 a-=-~~.:~~ ~2--:..4_4~.__~_~~2__ __._____.___+ 1!~~Jn~~_c Ar:Qn:.:~.:_:::.c"I~_nA~~~ - _J.!~l~_~:..__=___ INSiJRHi : I~J_. Jr'~i.. ft W.stl1.1d Insur.ano;t CoJRtollny I " . r~-~~~", >< ~~~~'-. "_..~-:~....: -~ ~~~~~!-_----L '1 aSl~-!.___ Oakhurst Construction Co. rnc, ' I:I~,JI'ED c b..dc.n Ec.nOl1l~ h.unnc. 00 I I ~gIn;i; LPL sg~~~ P~1~z:~ ~._==-=-=--=-~~-=-~=-=-=--:--===== COVERAGES .tlCORD.. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE T\.lE P')L!'= IE'S (.IF 1~'lSUR.~NCE t..I~.,TED l;E~G\r.' l-.,L.".'E ;;:=Er oj :~;~:dEC' -i'C" ThE !r.;-:.,t'~'EQ ~,-'.!l,~.A~:"C ~\FOVE .::')P Troll::: Pi)".::"',! PERK.{I INC:,V:~TED. ~~C'T\I\!ITHST,A.i<)I!-.J':; #r( ~:;:EI::J":iREt\1Er.[,'. TER;..1 {JP (:C.'I'J':'I-I!(,:~: '.~J': ,!lyW ::OhTR.n.CT CR OTi-:EP U)Ct_~!L,..IE;'J; '.\IIT-j h''::~.,~~C:T -:",j ',,\':'''WJ'~ Tl-HS 1::Er:(r!r.:IC~iE ",1AY 8E ISSUED D~ MO,":' PE....',.,~it-:. Trjf:>J::I)p;\l"~~T<li"F::"RGcC! EJ{ iH':: F-,:,-.'..'C1ES CES(:RIPfD ~.ERt:=.;!": 1:.5 ~~')6.Ji::d'r -:-c; ,!.,LL 'fHE TL:R:\Il~,. [XCU):,:Oi"';S AND C..Jf,![;:iiO.'i':,; OF ::~UCh ;::OLiCIE~.' o..l:';'GF:::~~.." T:: UI'/~I-:-~~ ~,;j:)'~'/: I:' ',:',':' ;-i..:o.:,iE eEe~ txECtl,:::::2 6'( P'!',~:' ::.''.--'::,lr..S Tl'PE O-F-;;~~;;:;,~---'.r---POLICY ''IU~~-e-ER'-'---+~J\~~~~b~~rl , - .-- ~ I~SR~ I LIMITS .- GEt-lERA!. LlAelLlr.' 1 ,: I EACH c.CClJiREIKE I $ 1000000 r.::l , , , , OS/22/'07 I OS/22/08 i.."lA"'1."'f.::: I I) Kc:N I !:.~.J I ~--- A X ,A, ((J~.lMEF>:IC,L ~:.E!JeR,,.:ll !.lABdJT'!' CWP3987~02 I I PRE:,~ISES(Ea teCcr.ne.) $ 150000 ~~_.J ':'L ' "'~':,; t.~^C,r: ~J ,:.:'-:'f~'~' i : !~:..sv.' (i,n" ~o"""il f 10000_ , I -- ~~ =-_________~ i i I i PERSOr'rl..tAD,IINJURY 1$1000000 i I ,:,~,~~".c .'.".'~~'.'-'~ : t .2000000 ~= .--' I I GEl/I. "'GGREG~TELIMIT,"FFL,ES ~E" i I r1'DUCTS - O~IP/OP AG~ 20 ~OO O~,_ I, PC'lIC't r-l PRO. 'lLOC i I : .JEer i I I I AUTOMOBILE "lABILITY . "1'- I I , II c.,f."rtLiT- I i I COr,~alr'IEDWJGLELIMIT ! !' 1000000 C e-.J ' .. 'J I 02CElO97363 I 06/22/07 06/22/08 : (Eo eC':loeot: -l -- I ~ ,..:,!I ,iWI\IFn ~ :T0S I I I I ! I eCC<IL" II~JU";-- $ I I SCHEC*...I;.EO ,41JT03 I I I ~P8r PArSon) I ~ I ! HIHFr, :.l.l n. ~I'; I ! 5CC~L'( ni"iUR{ ; !', ';-j I I I I?er J.oCldBlii --L:- i XI r..)!'l.J\J !~ED loLrr:.,:) I I ~----- ---- , I I ! . I -.------ I . I ! PROPERTY DAMAGE I f i I i I \ lPeraCCtdGrt) 1 ---" I - I I ~~OI~L'-.=-~~'~~___._ ; l C.A~~= LtABIlIT~' i I i 1 ! .l.,[\;\' ;';JT:') I i , , I C:THEfi' ~rJ EIo A(~.0____ i :-1 I , i I , I A,UTe or.:. , N"C. i $ ~' I --- , i 1 I I [ f:X\:E3StUMBRELLA UA8ILI'N i I j EA.,:~(C'....!R~~~(E --l:-~--- I : ---I ':)':\::)~ [-1:~.A,lf.6 ~.;t;":)E I ~;~:~E('.ATE ------t!-- __ , I t--., .., I I , . ! -1-!-- . I I ,-"1 O=:DI)~T:S~ ~ ~ ! J I , f 1------1 , I ! ,--------r-------- ! R8E\JT:(;tJ : I ; ~ I - -t------- I ----+-~~.,!..),1~.> 1 ~ ! '11:0=<,' ER~ ':'("APE~;i;.; Tn!! AI,It' i i EMPLOYERS' "IABILTi 20C4!;j!j4<l i 12/20/IJ7 I 12/20/0e ~_~~' LI~,!1:1~.L_Lf~---_-_u_ Ei I ~t" < Ph.0j:,~'E';'"CR,:-....,R rr~:-:q,E' EI.. .IT ,,' I 'c. C"-':'.,,<,:',c.c:r1T If 500000 , - I f--.----~-----.--- i ~)f ri(Cn,'..1C'..,OCf,' t.:,'CL;...:Y:C . I I I>: L Ul:>IoA>to- >:,Ll,>:Mf'L,jI!:.t ~ 500000 I !f '~:=" d,=5~r bEl unoer It:'- Lbt""t-f'\.'L'U LlIJI' I ~ !500000 i :;FtIJAl ~'H<}vl~lj~IN~ t-~:I)I'J . ----r-----.--,-------!- I ! I OTt'ii:R i I i I i ! I , : i ~ i , :)ESCRIPTlOt.; ,')F C.'rc=v:..TiCI\15 J L r')CArOr~5 : ...1;HtCLESlEXCLUSIOt,S ~\DGEC8).F.i~~5R~E~~T,i Sf:ECIAL PROl/ISl0tiS PROJECT: CLEARWATER B~ACH LIBRARY RECREATIOn CONSOLIDATION (07-0044-PR) CERTIE'ICAT!: HOLDER IS .MlDITIONAL INSURED WITH RESPECT~, TO GENERAL LIAl3LITY SUBJECT TO ALL TERNS I CONDITIONS 1>.NI) EXCLUSIONS OF THE POLICIES . .. .~ CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITYOrC ~I<[)III n Afti' ,1F"",F :0;(,111' nF~rFlIFFr, P{)lI"'IF~ RF r:ANrl'1l Fr, RFFnFlF TI<F FxFIFi.lTI,1r1 n~TF:: ""HFRI=OF, THF i~::\lJIN~ tN~lIRFR W'i' FNnFA\/qR Tr, ~1AII 30 r,AY1\ WRI"TFN CITY OF CLEARWATER P () BOX 4748 CL~~1h~ER FL 33759 NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HfJLDER flAMED TO THE LEfT, BUT FAll.URE TO ttO SC SI<ALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATIO! J OR lIABILm' OF AI'lY I(INO UPON 7HE INSURER, ITS '-GENTS OR <9 ACORD CORPORATION 1l/l:l11 ACORD l, (lUUT/OII) '.' ~.. . it ~.